JP6494154B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. A configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game state is shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  As a gaming machine as described above, there is known a configuration in which an effect operating device operated by a player is provided, and the content of the effect is changed according to the operation of the effect operating device. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, an effect operation device is provided on the front surface of the game machine, and an effect according to the operation of the effect operation device by the player is performed on a screen display in order to make the player expect a special game state to occur. The configuration is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As a result, the player operates the effect operating device while expecting the occurrence of a special gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

JP 2008-029764 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a novel gaming machine is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a novel gaming machine.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is provided with a grant determining means for performing grant determination for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a privilege grant result;
Production execution means for performing production,
Unit effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that the unit effect ends in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant determination after the unit effect is started;
Motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
Specific control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a specific effect is executed when a corresponding execution condition is established based on the player's motion being detected by the motion detection means within a predetermined period of time . When,
In the situation where the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period of the unit performance of the predetermined execution times, the predetermined period is set in the unit effect corresponding to the grant determination as the bonus grant result thereafter. An opportunity giving means to generate,
With
The specific control means, detects the number of operations of the player in the operation detection means for the corresponding execution condition during the period is determined to have satisfied the predetermined period is generated by the opportunity applying means, the predetermined means to be a number less than the detection frequency of operation of the player in the operation detection means for the corresponding execution condition during the period is determined to have satisfied the predetermined time period in the unit directing the execution times It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram of the game board for demonstrating a curtain plate movable unit and a disk movable unit. (A)-(e) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of a curtain plate movable body. (A)-(e) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of a disk movable object. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data table for patterns which can be selected when it becomes a highly accurate hit result. It is a flowchart which shows the separate response | compatibility process performed with display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command setting process performed in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data group for light emission, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a light emission data area. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a pallet data group, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a starting position data group, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a list data group, d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a group data group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a data selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the light emission data performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data expansion | deployment process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of light emission data. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that light emission control is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data group for sound output, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a sound output data area. It is a flowchart which shows the read-out process of the sound output data performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the sound output control process performed in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a base data table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st branch side data table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd branch side data table. It is a flowchart which shows the task process for the operation effects performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation type | system | group corresponding | compatible process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation type | system | group setting process performed with display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect response | compatibility process performed in sound light side MPU. (A)-(i) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the operation effect. It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that an operation effect progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process performed in the sound light side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process for operation effects performed by the display side MPU in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. Although a detailed explanation by illustration is omitted, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 and a front portion of the inner frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame. And a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame and rotatably supported by the inner frame. In addition, the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The front door frame has a function to lock the inner door frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A gaming board 20 shown in FIG. 2 is mounted on the gaming machine main body 12. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

  The game board 20 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 21, a special electricity winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a special drawing display unit 33, a general drawing display unit 34, and the like. ing. When a ball entering the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 is generated, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

  Here, the entry means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the state of being discharged to the back side of the game board 20 when passing through the opening but also passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area later is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the general winning port 21, the special electric prize device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, or the through gate 25 The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with a universal power 24a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the winning of the lower operating port 24 becomes possible when the electric utility item 24a is opened.

  The special electric prize winning device 22 includes an unillustrated large winning opening that leads to the back side of the game board 20 and an open / close door 22a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The open / close door 22a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 22a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a jackpot result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  The special figure display part 33 and the common figure display part 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the special figure display unit 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is performed as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is clearly displayed. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The result of the internal lottery is displayed in the special figure display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a special stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 33. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The special figure display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT, dot matrix, and other types of display devices. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the special figure display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the general map display unit 34, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 25 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed as a stop result of the variation display. Specified by. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric train, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the general map display unit 34 and the change display is displayed. After being stopped, it will transition to the open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric utility 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays a symbol which is a kind of a symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display surface G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ing. In addition, the center frame 32 is provided with a stage portion 32a at the lower portion thereof where the game ball can roll in the lateral direction. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion formed on the left side of the center frame 32 is supplied to the stage portion 32a by passing through the lead-out passage formed on the left side. Then, the game ball that falls downward from the position near the center in the stage portion 32a is likely to win the upper working port 23.

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 33, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 accordingly. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset active line.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. Further, as shown in FIG. 4A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display surface G. . Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Also, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 23, 24, the special display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 start the variable display until the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 2, a special figure holding light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 33. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed when the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 is turned on. Further, at a position adjacent to the universal map display unit 34, a universal map holding light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the universal map display unit 34 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose holding light emitting unit 36. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance light emission parts 35 and 36 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  Here, in addition to the symbol display device 31, the variable display unit 26 includes a curtain plate movable unit 51 and a pair of left and right disk movable units as a plurality of output devices used for performing effects and notifications. 61a and 61b, the 1st light emission part group 71, the 2nd light emission part group 72, and the 3rd light emission part group 73 are provided. The curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the game board 20 for explaining the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b.

  The curtain plate movable unit 51 is arranged in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, covers a part of the display surface G from the front, and is provided so that the covered region is variable. And a plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a, 53b for displacing the curtain plate movable object 52. The curtain plate movable object 52 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged such that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction.

  A left curtain plate drive unit 53a is provided as a part of a plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the left end than the central position in the longitudinal direction of the movable curtain plate 52. In addition, a right curtain plate drive unit 53b is provided as a remainder of the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b at a position closer to the right end than the central position in the longitudinal direction in the movable curtain plate 52. Yes. That is, a pair of left and right curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b is provided as the plurality of curtain plate drive units 53a and 53b.

  The left curtain plate drive unit 53a and the right curtain plate drive unit 53b have the same configuration. Specifically, each curtain plate drive unit 53a, 53b includes curtain plate rails 54a, 54b extending in the vertical direction. The curtains 54a and 54b are provided at a position above the upper edge of the exposed opening 32b that exposes the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 in the center frame 32. Curtain plate rails 54 a and 54 b are set to have a vertical dimension larger than the vertical dimension of curtain plate movable object 52, and the entirety thereof exists on the back surface of center frame 32. That is, the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b are provided so as not to protrude toward the exposed opening 32b.

  Slide members 55a and 55b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the curtain rails 54a and 54b. The slide members 55a and 55b are slidable in the vertical direction along the corresponding curtain rails 54a and 54b. Each of the slide members 55a and 55b is integrated with the movable curtain plate 52 via a connecting portion (not shown). In this case, the left slide member 55a is integrated with a region closer to the left end than the center position in the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate movable object 52, and the right slide member 55b is integrated with the curtain plate movable object 52. Are integrated with the region closer to the right end than the center position in the longitudinal direction. The slide members 55a and 55b are fixed so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the curtain plate movable object 52. As the slide members 55a and 55b slide on the corresponding curtain plate rails 54a and 54b, the movable curtain plate 52 integrated with the slide members 55a and 55b is displaced in the vertical direction.

  There is a predetermined play at the connecting portion between the curtain plate movable object 52 and each of the slide members 55a and 55b, and the curtain plate movable object 52 in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the front-rear direction as the rotation axis. Displacement is allowed. As a result, the height position of one of the slide members 55a and 55b can be made different from the other within the range until the tilt angle of the movable curtain plate 52 reaches a predetermined angle.

  Each slide member 55a, 55b is provided with a pinion gear (not shown), and each curtain plate rail 54a, 54b is provided with a rack (not shown). Each slide member 55a, 55b is provided with curtain plate driving portions 56a, 56b for rotating the pinion gear. When the left curtain plate driving portion 56a is in a driving state, the left slide member 55a is displaced in the vertical direction, and the left area of the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the right area. When the curtain plate driving portion 56b is in a driving state, the right slide member 55b is displaced in the vertical direction, and the right area of the movable curtain plate 52 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the left area. Further, since both the left curtain plate drive unit 56a and the right curtain plate drive unit 56b are in the drive state, the left and right slide members 55a and 55b are both displaced in the vertical direction, and the entire curtain plate movable object 52 is moved. Is displaced in the vertical direction.

  When the slide members 55a and 55b are present on the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b on the side farthest from the exposure opening 32b, that is, at the upper ends of the curtain plate rails 54a and 54b. Most of the movable curtain plate 52 is hidden behind the center frame 32, and only a small area is located in the exposure opening 32b. This position is the initial position of the curtain plate movable object 52, and in the situation where the effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 is not performed, the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position.

  When the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position, the curtain plate drive parts 56a and 56b are driven, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 moves toward the center of the exposure opening 32b. . This displacement is performed with the position where each slide member 55a, 55b reaches the end of the curtain rails 54a, 54b close to the exposed opening 32b, that is, the lower end of the curtain rails 54a, 54b as the limit position. Is called. When the curtain plate movable object 52 is lowered, the area exposed from the exposure opening 32b in the curtain plate movable object 52 is widened.

  In a configuration in which the curtain plate movable object 52 can be displaced between the initial position and the limit position, curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided for detecting that the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position. It has been. The curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. As the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, optical sensors are used, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic type sensor is arbitrary.

  In addition to the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided as sensors for detecting the position of the curtain plate movable object 52. The adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the slide members 55a and 55b. More specifically, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b detect the presence of the slide members 55a and 55b at predetermined positions that are closer to the limit position than the initial position. Is provided so as to detect the presence of the slide members 55a and 55b at the intermediate position. Note that optical sensors are used as the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b, but the type of sensor such as a switch sensor or an electromagnetic sensor is arbitrary.

  The operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the situation where the curtain plate movable object 52 is disposed at the initial position, the curtain plate drive portions 56a and 56b are driven so that the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered together. As a result, the entire movable curtain plate 52 is displaced downward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 6D), and thereafter the curtains are moved so that the vertical positions of the slide members 55a and 55b relatively change. When the plate driving portions 56a and 56b are in the driving state, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C, the curtain plate movable object 52 is left in a state where most of the curtain plate movable object 52 is exposed through the exposure opening 32b. The state where the vehicle is inclined downward and the state where it is downwardly inclined to the right are alternately repeated. As a result, as the operation mode of the curtain plate movable object 52, there are not only a mode of lowering but also a mode of tilting to the left and right, thereby diversifying the mode of operation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6D, the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b are driven until the slide members 55a and 55b are respectively detected by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. . Thus, the movable curtain plate 52 is in a horizontal state at a position slightly returned to the initial position side. Thereafter, the curtain plate driving portions 56a and 56b are driven so that the slide members 55a and 55b are lowered together. As shown in FIG. The whole is displaced downward while maintaining the state.

  As described above, when switching to the operation mode in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately inclined after the operation mode in which the curtain plate movable object 52 is alternately tilted, both the slide members 55a and 55b detect by the corresponding adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. By being configured to be lowered after being moved, the movable curtain plate 52 can be lowered in a horizontal state.

  Further, the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b are purposely provided on the limit position side of the curtain plate initial position sensors 57a and 57b, and the curtain plate movable object 52 is in a horizontal state using the detection results of the adjustment position sensors 58a and 58b. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the curtain plate movable object 52 to the initial position when the operation mode is changed to the operation mode in which it is horizontally lowered after the operation mode of alternately inclining. As a result, the operation mode can be switched at an early stage.

  When the effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 is finished, the curtain plate drive parts 56a and 56b are driven in opposite directions, so that the curtain plate movable object 52 maintains a horizontal state. Ascending, it will eventually return to the initial position. Further, the effect using the curtain plate movable object 52 is used as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot result is medium or higher. For example, when the degree of expectation is medium, the effect is alternately inclined. Although the effect by the operation mode is performed, the effect by the operation mode to be lowered horizontally is not performed, and when the degree of expectation is high, the operation mode by which the effect is alternately lowered and the effect is lowered horizontally Production is performed.

  Next, the disk movable units 61a and 61b will be described with reference to FIG. 5 again.

  The disc movable units 61a and 61b are a pair of discs that are arranged in front of the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 so as to cover a part of the display surface G from the front and to change the covered region. Animals 62a and 62b and a pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b for displacing the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b are provided. Each disk movable object 62a, 62b has the same configuration, and has a circular shape when viewed from the front. Moreover, the same decoration is given to the front of each disc movable thing 62a, 62b. The decoration has a shape having anisotropy that does not overlap between the case where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a predetermined rotation position and the case where the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at a specific rotation position different from that. Yes. More specifically, the decoration has a shape with anisotropy that does not overlap between any rotational positions of the movable discs 62a and 62b. In addition, the outer edge shape of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b may be a shape having anisotropy that does not overlap between predetermined rotation positions, and has an anisotropy that does not overlap between any rotation positions. It may be a shape.

  Each disk movable object 62a, 62b is driven by the corresponding disk drive unit 63a, 63b to rotate and slide. The pair of disk drive units 63a and 63b have the same configuration. Specifically, each disk drive unit 63a, 63b is a disk rail 64a, 64b that extends obliquely from the outside of each corner below the exposed opening 32b toward the center of the exposed opening 32b. It has. The disc rails 64a and 64b are provided so as to extend in and out of the exposed opening 32b with reference to the peripheral edge of the exposed opening 32b. The disc rails 64 a and 64 b are set to have a length dimension larger than the diameter of the disc movable objects 62 a and 62 b, and a part of the disc rails 64 a and 62 b exists on the back surface of the center frame 32.

  Shaft guide members 65a and 65b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the disk rails 64a and 64b. Each of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b is slidable in an oblique direction along the corresponding disk rails 64a and 64b, and the rotary base, which is a part of the member, can be moved back and forth at an arbitrary slide position. Can be rotated about the rotation axis. The shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b are integrated with the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b through the rotation shafts inserted into the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Each of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b is provided on the back surface of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b, and is entirely covered from the front by the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. When the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts slide on the corresponding disc rails 64a and 64b, the movable discs 62a and 62b integrated with the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are displaced obliquely. When the rotary bases of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b rotate, the movable discs 62a and 62b integrated with the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b rotate.

  Each of the disk rails 64a and 64b is provided with a driving roller (not shown), a driven roller, and a conveyor belt that is driven by these rollers, and the guide members 65a and 65b with shafts are connected to each other to engage with the conveyor belt (not shown). Is provided. Each of the disk rails 64a and 64b is provided with disk slide drive parts 66a and 66b for driving the drive roller to rotate. When the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are in the drive state, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b are displaced in an oblique direction. Each of the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b is provided with disk rotation driving portions 67a and 67b (not shown) for rotating the rotary base. When the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b are in a driving state, the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate.

  When the guide members with shafts 65a and 65b are present in the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction on the disk rails 64a and 64b, part of the corresponding disk movable objects 62a and 62b is hidden behind the center frame 32, and Only the region of the portion is the position where it exists in the exposed opening 32b. This position is an initial position in the sliding direction of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. Further, in the situation where the effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is not performed, the disk movable object 62a so that a predetermined portion of the decoration attached to the surface of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is a predetermined rotation position. , 62b is determined. This position is the initial position in the rotational direction of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The initial position in the sliding direction and the initial position in the rotational direction is the initial position of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b.

  When the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are placed in the initial positions, the corresponding disk slide driving parts 66a and 66b are in the driven state, so that the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are directed toward the center of the exposed opening 32b. Move. The displacement is determined by taking the position at which the shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b reach the end near the center of the exposed opening 32b in the disk rails 64a and 64b, that is, the upper end of the disk rails 64a and 64b as the limit position. Done. In the state of being arranged at this limit position, the entire disk movable objects 62a and 62b are exposed through the exposure opening 32b. Further, the disk rotation driving parts 67a and 67b are in a driving state at an arbitrary position in the sliding direction, whereby the disk movable objects 62a and 62b rotate. The rotating operation can be performed even while the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are sliding.

  Slide for detecting that the movable discs 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial position in the sliding direction in the configuration in which the movable discs 62a and 62b can slide between the initial position and the limit position in the sliding direction. Initial position sensors 68a and 68b are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the movable discs 62a and 62b. The slide initial position sensors 68 a and 68 b are provided on the back surface of the center frame 32. Note that optical sensors are used as the initial slide position sensors 68a and 68b, but the type of sensor such as a switch sensor or an electromagnetic sensor is arbitrary.

  In the configuration in which the movable discs 62a and 62b are rotatable and the initial position in the rotational direction exists as the rotational position of the movable discs 62a and 62b, the movable discs 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions in the rotational direction. Rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b for detecting the movement are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. The rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b are provided on the corresponding shaft-equipped guide members 65a and 65b, and are provided so as not to follow the rotation of the rotary base and the disk movable objects 62a and 62b. As the rotation initial position sensors 69a and 69b, optical sensors are used, but the type of sensor such as a switch type sensor or an electromagnetic sensor is arbitrary.

  The operation of the movable discs 62a and 62b will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the situation where the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are arranged at the initial positions, the disc slide driving units 66a and 66b are in the drive state, so that the disc movable objects 62a and 62b are driven. The sliding movement of the respective disk movable objects 62a and 62b is stopped by sliding in the oblique direction and reaching the limit position as shown in FIG. 7B. In this case, the disk slide drive units 66a and 66b are driven so that the slide movements of the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized. Further, while the slide movement is being performed, the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b are maintained in the non-driven state, and therefore the disk movable objects 62a and 62b are not rotated.

  Thereafter, when the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b are driven, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b start to rotate in a predetermined direction as shown in FIG. 7C. In this case, the initial position in the rotation direction of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is set so that the decoration attached to the front of each disk movable object 62a, 62b is in the same mode. The decorative aspects of the movable discs 62a and 62b are the same. Each of the movable discs 62a and 62b starts rotating at the same start timing, and rotates in the same direction at the same rotational speed. Therefore, each disk movable object 62a, 62b rotates in a state synchronized with each other.

  Thereafter, each disk slide drive unit 66a, 66b is driven in the reverse direction, whereby each disk movable object 62a, 62b starts sliding movement toward the initial position in the slide direction, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the initial position in the sliding direction is finally returned. In this case, since the drive state of the disk rotation driving units 67a and 67b is maintained even while the slide movement toward the initial position is performed, the disk movable objects 62a and 62b slide and move while rotating. It will be. These slide movements and rotations are also performed in synchronization with each other between the movable discs 62a and 62b. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), the rotational position of the movable discs 62a and 62b is stopped by the rotational position of the movable discs 62a and 62b becoming the initial position in the rotational direction.

  In addition, the effect using the disk movable objects 62a and 62b is used as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot result is medium or higher. For example, when the degree of expectation is medium, the slide operation and the rotation operation as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7E are performed on only one of the pair of movable discs 62a and 62b. When the degree is high, the slide operation and the rotation operation as shown in FIGS. 7A to 7E are performed while both the pair of disk movable objects 62a and 62b are synchronized.

  Next, the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are all provided in the center frame 32. Each light emission part group 71-73 is provided with several LED71a, 72a, 73a as a some light-emitting body, respectively. These LEDs 71a to 73a are of a multi-color emission type and can emit at least white, blue, red, green, and yellow light. Each light emission part group 71-73 is arranged so that a plurality of LEDs 71a-73a may become a plurality of columns and a plurality of rows. In this case, when the light emitting units 71 to 73 are irradiated with light of different colors between different columns or different rows, the LEDs 71a to 73a can be recognized so that the player can recognize the color difference. The position and light intensity are set. In addition, although the number of LED differs between each light emission part groups 71-73, and also the aspect of arrangement | sequence is also different, the number or arrangement | sequence aspect of LED is the same among some light emission part groups 71-73. It is good also as a structure which is the same, and it is good also as a structure where the number or arrangement | sequence aspect of LED is the same among all the light emission part groups 71-73.

  Each of the LEDs 71a to 73a of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is provided so as to be covered from the front by the light transmitting portions 74, 75, and 76 formed in the center frame 32 so as to be translucent white. Of each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the first light emitting unit group 71 is provided on the left side above the exposed opening 32b, and the second light emitting unit group 72 is above the exposed opening 32b. The third light emitting unit group 73 is provided at a position on the right side of the exposure opening 32b.

  The lighting of the light in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is used as an effect and is also used as a state notification of the pachinko machine 10. These contents will be described later in detail.

  Returning to the description of the game board 20, a rail part 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is constituted by the rail part 37, and a game ball launched on the inner frame below the game board 20 is launched. A game ball launched from a mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the gaming ball launching mechanism, a launching operation of a gaming ball is performed by operating a launching handle 41 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine body 12.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a window portion 42 is formed on the front portion of the gaming machine main body 12 so that almost the entire gaming area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 (not shown) is fitted therein. Although the window panel 43 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light-emitting part 44 is provided above the window part 42 as a part of the light-emitting means. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window part 42 in the front part of the gaming machine main body 12, an upper bulging part 46 and a lower bulging part 47 that bulge to the near side are arranged vertically. An upper pan 46 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower pan 47 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In an area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 46, an effect operating device 48 having an operation portion that is manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is the predetermined effect content.

  On the back side of the gaming machine main body 12, a main control device, a sound emission control device, a display control device, a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply / launch control device are mounted. Yes. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 90 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power source. The main control device 90 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of opening to the board box that accommodates the main control board 91 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are joined in an inseparable manner, and a structure of a joint portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 90.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 101 provided in the main control device 90 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power source / launch control device 102 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 92 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Each of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e has a one-to-one detection with respect to a winning-corresponding pitched portion such as a general winning port 21, a special electric winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, and a through gate 25. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, in the MPU 92, various lotteries are executed based on winnings in the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24.

  On the output side of the MPU 92, a power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 101, and a sound emission control device 103 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control apparatus 101 based on a winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning part. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 103. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a special electric drive unit 22b for opening and closing the open / close door 22a of the special electric prize winning device 22, and a general electric drive unit 24b for opening and closing the electric utility item 24a of the lower operating port 24, A special map display unit 33 and a general map display unit 34 are connected. Although not shown in FIG. 8, a special figure holding light emitting unit 35 and a universal figure holding light emitting unit 36 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 22b so that the special electric prize winning device 22 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 24a is elected in the open state, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the power generator 24b so that the power utility item 24a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 24a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general map display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 92. In addition, when winning is awarded to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 33, the display control of the special figure holding light emitting unit 35 is executed in the MPU 92, When a winning to the through gate 25 occurs, or when a variable display is started in the general map display unit 34, the display control of the general map hold light emitting unit 36 is executed in the MPU 92.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power / fire control device 102, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 102. The payout control device 101 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 104 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 90.

  The power source / launch control device 102 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 91 and the payout control device 101 and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 102 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power interruption The storage holding power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 90. The power supply / launch control device 102 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 105, and the game ball launch mechanism 105 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound light emission control device 103 includes a sound light emission control board 111 on which the MPU 112 is mounted. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  Based on the command received from the main control device 90, the MPU 112 determines the contents of effects to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like. And while performing the light emission control of the 1st light emission part group 71, the 2nd light emission part group 72, and the 3rd light emission part group 73 which were provided in the game board 20 so that the operation | movement corresponding to the determined content may be performed, Sound output control of the speaker unit 45 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 8, the MPU 112 controls the driving of the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b provided on the game board 20, and is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12. Light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed. In addition, an effect operating device 48 is electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 monitors the presence / absence of operation of the effect operating device 48, and when the effect operating device 48 is operated, A process for reflecting the operation on the progress of the performance is executed. Furthermore, the MPU 112 identifies whether or not notification is necessary based on the command received from the main controller 90, and performs light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45. This is notified.

  The MPU 112 is electrically connected to the display control device 120. The MPU 112 transmits to the display control device 120 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 90 and a notification including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 90. The display control device 120 is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 90 without going through the sound emission control device 103, and communicates with the main control device 90 more than the sound emission control device 103. It can be said that it exists downstream in the direction.

  The display control device 120 includes a display control board 121 on which an MPU 122 that is an element in which a program ROM 123 and a work RAM 124 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 125, a character ROM 126, and a video RAM 127 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 122 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 103 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 125 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 125).

  The program ROM 123 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 122 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 124 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 122, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 125 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 125 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 125 can be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 125 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 122, the video RAM 127, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 127 from the character ROM 126 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

  The character ROM 126 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 126 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 127 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 127.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 112, the ROM 113, and the RAM 114 of the sound emission control device 103 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 112, the sound light side ROM 113, and the sound light side RAM 114, respectively. The work RAM 124 is referred to as a display side MPU 122, a display side ROM 123, and a display side RAM 124, respectively.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by bidirectional communication.

  That is, the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected using the first signal line group 131, and display is performed from the sound light side MPU 112 using the first signal line group 131. A command is transmitted to the side MPU 122. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 131 includes a signal line 132 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, data of 1 bit) included in the command data. A signal line 133 for identifying a clock signal, and a signal line 134 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  Further, the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are electrically connected using a second signal line group 141, and sound light is emitted from the display side MPU 122 using the second signal line group 141. A command is transmitted to the side MPU 112. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 141 includes a serial command data transmission signal line 142 and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A signal line 143 for identifying a clock signal, and a signal line 144 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  The first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one ends of the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 are aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector emits sound. The connector of the control device 103 is detachably attached, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 120.

  The communication method between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 131 and the second signal line group 141 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 90>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 90 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 92 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 31 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 The counter CS is used. Furthermore, the utility power release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the utility power 24a of the lower operation port 24 is set to the utility power open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved storage provided as an acquisition information storage means in the RAM 94 when a winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 occurs. Stored in area 94a.

  The holding storage area 94a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 33, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general electric power holding area 94c of the RAM 94 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the universal utility 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the universal utility release counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 24 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, the utility object 24a of the lower working port 24 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the electric utility item using the electric utility item release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility 24a is opened when the public power open state is selected is set more than in the low frequency support mode. It is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric power utility is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 24a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a minimum secured time (the minimum secured time for the next public power utility opening lottery after the first public power utility opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode ( That is, the display duration time for one time in the normal map display unit 34 is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode becomes open to the public power per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the general electric utility is open. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a public power open state win in lottery. In addition, a secured time (for example, a general map display unit 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) is secured after the next public utility product opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, it is easier to select a short securing time or the average securing time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. It may be set. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the secured time that is secured after the next public power utility release lottery is performed. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Also good.

  For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to zero. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 94a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24.

  The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 93 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 94 a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 93 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the high probability big hit result. ing.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Further, the high-probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which a round game is played 15 times. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a special electric prize winning device 22 is satisfied. That is. The upper limit duration is set to 29 sec, and the upper limit number is set to nine. In each round game, the special electricity prize winning device 22 is opened only once, but the opening may be performed a plurality of times.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 105 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. . Then, in each round game, an upper limit duration time that is longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game is set. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the special electricity prize winning device 22 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, and the remaining combinations are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is started, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. To be executed.

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main controller 90 but by the sound emission controller 103. In this case, in the sound emission control device 103, the game times corresponding to any one of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the miss result, and a notice display with a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 31.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display duration time in the special symbol display unit 33 and the symbol display duration time in the symbol display device 31. The value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 33 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31.

<Various types of processing executed by the MPU 92 of the main controller 90>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in MPU92 of the main controller 90 is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 92 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 94 is permitted, and the internal function register of the MPU 92 is set in step S103.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 102 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1” is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control apparatus 101 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control apparatus 101.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 94, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 92 will be described. The main control board 91 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency dividing circuit so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 92. Is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 92. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 92 at intervals of a 4 msec period which is a specific period. The MPU 92 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt process with at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 92, there is a case where the next timer interrupt process is started after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 92, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 92 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing In the timer interrupt processing at, the portion exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Specifically, a radio wave detection sensor, a magnet detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. The MPU 92 determines whether or not unauthorized radio waves are output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor, and the magnet is attached to the game board 20 based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor. It is determined whether or not an action of approaching is performed, and it is determined whether or not unauthorized vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these determinations, it is determined that a specific event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped. If the progress of the game is stopped, in step S207, the notification command output process is executed, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the process for outputting the notification command, if any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event, the notification command is sent to the sound emission control device 103. Output. Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, the sound emission control apparatus 103 performs notification execution setting corresponding to the content of the specific event.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S206 that the progress of the game is not stopped, the processing after step S208 is executed. In step S208, a cancel command output process is executed. Release command output processing is performed when the state where the specific event that triggered the notification command output has already been released and the release command has not yet been output for the release. The command is output to the sound emission control device 103. Since the release command includes the content of the specific event to be released that triggered the output, the sound emission control device 103 performs notification cancellation setting corresponding to the specific event.

  In the subsequent step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 22b and 24b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 22 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 22b is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the power utility 24a of the lower working port 24 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 24b for the general power is started and the information to be switched to the closed state. Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In the subsequent step S210, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S211, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read and the general winning port 21, the special electric winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 and the through gate 25 are entered. Execute the process to identify the presence or absence.

  In the subsequent step S212, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 94 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S213, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued for the launch handle 41, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S214, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e and release confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S210. In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine main body 12 is released, a notification command output process is executed as in step S207. In the notification command output process, a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state and a notification command indicating that a disconnection has occurred in each of the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are transmitted. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 101, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 47a is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 104. If such a determination is made and an affirmative determination is made in these determinations, a corresponding notification command is transmitted.

  In the subsequent step S215, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the following step S216, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary map electric power control process, when winning through the through gate 25 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the universal electric utility release counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. In such a case, the numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed in response to the opening determination. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility tool 24a of the lower working port 24 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S217, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 33 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display content of the general map display unit 34 is updated. Set the output information for

  In subsequent step S218, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control apparatus 101 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S220, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal in accordance with the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process (step S215).

  In the special figure special power control process, first, a hold information acquisition process is executed in step S301. In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated for the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. If a winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding storage area 94a is the upper limit value ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). When the number of reserves is less than the upper limit value, 1 is added to the number of holds, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE.

  In addition, when winning to the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 occurs at the same time, the process for obtaining the hold information is performed a plurality of times within a range in which the hold information obtaining process is executed once. Run.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, a process for reading information on a special figure special power counter provided in the RAM 94 is executed, and in step S303, a process for reading a special figure special electric address table from the ROM 93 is executed. In step S304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special electric control process includes a process related to the effect for game times and a process related to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as processing related to the effect for game times, special figure variation start processing (step S306) that is processing for starting the effect for game times and processing for advancing the effect for game times. A special figure changing process (step S307) and a special figure determining process (step S308) which is a process for ending the effect for the game round are set.

  In addition, as processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a special electricity release which is a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 22 Middle processing (step 310), special power closing processing (step S311) that is processing for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 22, the opening / closing execution mode ending and the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode A special electricity termination process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp which of the above-mentioned types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. In the special figure change start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the hold information is held and stored, and the game display in which the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 and the special figure display unit 33 is started. Execute the process. Details thereof will be described later.

  If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step S307. In the special figure changing process, a process for determining whether or not it is during the game continuation display time and before the final stop display is performed. Processing for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, after executing the above-described regular change processing, The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure finalizing process. Update to a compatible one.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. In the special figure determination process, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 in order to cause the symbol display device 31 to display the stop result of the current game round as a final stop display. The display mode is a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. In the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the period during which the final stop is displayed has elapsed. If the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. If the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition processing is executed.

  Incidentally, instead of waiting in the special figure finalizing process until the final stop display period elapses, the special figure finalizing process is terminated when the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure determination process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period of the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during which the final stop is displayed has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is initialized (that is, “0” is cleared) in a situation in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, and the opening / closing execution mode is In the situation where the transition occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the special electric charge start process.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. In the special electricity start process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special power open process. .

  If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special power release releasing process in step S310. In the special electric release opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of one round game, the special prize winning device 22 is set to an open state and an open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. If the end condition of the round game is not satisfied, the process is not waited for in the special power release process, but the special power release process is terminated after executing the process for monitoring the completion of the end condition. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric power open process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closed process. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special electricity closing process in step S311. In the special electricity closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 22 is closed and a closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric current closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric current opening process. To do.

  On the other hand, in the special power shut-off process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power shut-off process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination processing.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special power end process in step S312. In the special electric power end process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 103. In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing processing for setting the gaming state (open / close lottery mode and support mode) after the opening / closing execution mode, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is initialized. The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power end process to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing (step S306).

  In the special figure variation start process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the number of holds N is 1 or more. If the number of holds N is “0”, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. If the number N of holds is 1 or more, a data setting process is executed in step S402.

  In the data setting process, first, the hold number N is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the voice light emission control apparatus 103 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 93, information for success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value obtained from the hit random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the information matches the high probability jackpot information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 93, and the low probability jackpot. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the ROM 93, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the low probability jackpot result or the high probability jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the RAM 94 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result in step S405. “1” is set for the flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S408. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 33 in the game times corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes of step S407 and step S408, a display duration time grasping process is executed in step S409. In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the start of the current variation is a high probability big hit result or a low probability big hit result, it is determined that reach display occurs. If the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. get. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach occurs is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number N of holds is larger. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not be changed according to the number of holds N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a display duration table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of a non-reach outbreak result. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  In subsequent step S410, the display duration information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as the effects for the game times, the symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 33 and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 are performed. When these variation displays are ended, the game times are displayed. In the state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 31, a predetermined symbol combination is on standby on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the display continuation time can be rephrased as the time before the final stop.

  In subsequent step S411, the change command and the type command are set as output targets. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on the presence or absence of the reach is not included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 103 which is the sub-side control device can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the display duration. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step S411 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 103 which is a sub-side control device.

  After performing the process of step S411, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 33 is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S413 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, production control and notification execution control using various output devices executed by the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 will be described.

  As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 by bidirectional communication. And by exchanging commands by bidirectional communication, in the sound light side MPU 112, light emission control of various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73, Sound output control of the speaker unit 45 and drive control of various movable objects including the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b are executed, and the display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed in the display side MPU 122. . Hereinafter, specific processing contents for executing these various controls will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) by the sound light side MPU 112.

  In the timer interruption process, first, in step S501, a main-side command storage process is executed. The main-side command storage process is a process for storing a command in the sound-side RAM 114 when a command is received from the MPU 92 of the main control device 90 (hereinafter referred to as the main-side MPU 92). The sound side RAM 114 is provided with a main ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 92. The commands received from the main MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the main ring buffer. The data is sequentially read according to the stored order.

  In a succeeding step S502, display side command storage processing is executed. The display side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound side RAM 114 when a command is received from the display side MPU 122. The sound light side RAM 114 is provided with a display side ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the display side MPU 122. The commands received from the display side MPU 122 are sequentially stored in the display side ring buffer. The data is sequentially read according to the stored order.

  Thereafter, in step S503, a main-side command corresponding process for executing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 92 is executed, and in step S504, a process corresponding to the command received from the display-side MPU 122 is executed. The display side command corresponding process is executed, and in step S505, the light emission control process for performing the light emission control of the various light emitting units including the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 is performed. In step S506, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In step S507, various movable objects including the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable units 61a and 61b. The movable object control process for performing the drive control is executed. Although detailed description is omitted, in the movable object control process in step S507, the operations described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7 are performed on various movable objects according to the contents of the commands received from the main-side MPU 92 and the display-side MPU 122. Execute the process to make it happen. The processing contents of steps S503 to S506 will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated. In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where a unit of effect is executed at a predetermined start timing, such as a game turn effect, when the effect operating device 48 is operated, a period in which the effect progresses according to the content. Can occur.

  Here, the production operation device 48 is provided with an operation detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the operation unit is pressed and arranged at the operation position, and the operation detection sensor is operated by the operation unit. In a situation where there is no operation, a LOW level operation signal is output, and in a situation where the operation unit is being operated, an HI level operation signal is output. The sound light side MPU 112 periodically monitors the port portion to which data corresponding to the level of the signal received from the effect operating device 48 is written (for example, a cycle of 4 msec), and receives the LOW level signal. If the monitoring processing times for which the HI level signal is received next to the confirmed monitoring processing times are continued for a plurality of times (for example, twice), it is determined in step S508 that the effect operating device 48 has been operated. To do. Note that the HI / LOW relationship of the operation signal may be reversed, and the operation of the rendering operation device 48 is terminated instead of determining whether or not there is an operation on the side where the operation of the rendering operation device 48 is started. It is good also as a structure which judges the presence or absence of operation by the side.

  If a negative determination is made in step S508, the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S508, the operation generation command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 122 in step S509. Timer interrupt processing ends. The operation generation command is a command for causing the display-side MPU 122 to recognize that the effect operating device 48 has been operated. The effect of sending the command will be described later.

<Main-side command response processing of MPU 112 on the sound light side>
Next, the main-side command response process executed in step S503 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 92 or not. If these commands are received, game result storage processing is executed in step S602. Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 92 at the start of the current game round, that is, the current game Identifies information as to whether the game result of the game is a highly probable hit result, a low probable hit result, or a missed result, and executes a process of writing the specified information to the holding data area 161 provided in the sound side RAM 114 To do. The holding data area 161 is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, and notification, and the sound side MPU 112 even after the effects and notifications are started. This is an area for storing and holding data that can be used independently in the.

  In the subsequent step S603, a notice lottery process is executed. In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. As the notice display, as described above, in the situation where the symbol display is variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 31, or in a part of In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice display may occur at any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  In the subsequent step S604, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a highly probable result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5 is displayed as the stop result of this time. It is determined as information. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd symbols are easily selected as symbols forming the same symbol combination. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability winning result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5, It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach display is specified from the contents of the change command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result to be determined is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, this is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result is determined as information on the current stop result.

  In the subsequent step S605, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, the information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in step S602, And the production | generation pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the notice lottery process in the said step S603 is selected.

  In subsequent step S606, a process of writing each information of the type of effect pattern selected in step S605 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S604 to the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 is executed. Since the production pattern includes information on the display duration of the current game time, writing the production pattern information in the holding data area 161 allows not only the production pattern information but also the display duration information. The sound light side MPU 112 can read again. However, the sound light side MPU 112 does not measure the display duration time.

  In subsequent step S607, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S604 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S605 are transmitted to the display-side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S608, a game number updating process is executed. In the update process, a process for updating the game number counter is executed such that 1 is added to the number of digested games measured in the game number counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114. The number of times of digestion game is the number of game times that have been digested without re-entering the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The sound side MPU 112 can use the information on the number of digestion games when determining the contents of the production. For example, if the number of digestion games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a predetermined notice display is selected in the notice lottery process. Processes that make it easier.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, or after the processing in step S608 is executed, it is determined in step S609 whether a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122 in step S610. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 122 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round on the active lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609, or after the processing of step S610 has been executed, it is determined in step S611 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, update processing of the number of opening / closing execution modes is executed in step S612. In the update process, the open / close execution mode count counter is updated so that the open / close execution mode count measured in the open / close execution mode count counter provided in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 is incremented by one. Execute the process. The number of opening / closing execution modes refers to the number of opening / closing execution modes that occurred in a situation where the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode does not occur. The sound light side MPU 112 can use the information on the number of times of opening / closing execution mode when determining the contents of the effect. For example, if the number of times of opening / closing execution mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, An effect corresponding to that is executed.

  In the subsequent step S613, an opening handling process is executed. In the opening handling process, the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the production contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result are determined. Execute the process for In this case, the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time is a highly probable jackpot result, and the same even symbol is used instead of the same odd symbol combination in the symbol display device 31 in the immediately preceding game round. When the combination of is displayed as a final stop, an effect that includes content for allowing the player to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode has been promoted from the low probability mode to the high probability mode is displayed in the current opening / closing execution mode. Determine as.

  As already described herein, the retained data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 stores information on the game result and information on the type of the game stop symbol on the symbol display device 31 regarding the effect for the game turn. When the opening / closing execution mode is entered after the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 161 are cleared when the opening / closing execution mode ends. The Therefore, even if the opening command does not include information on the display content of the symbol display device 31 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Also, in the opening handling process in step S613, the number of opening / closing execution modes after the update in step S612 is specified, and an effect corresponding to the specified number of opening / closing execution modes is set as an effect in the current opening / closing execution mode.

  In the following step S614, an opening command corresponding to the processing result in step S613 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S611, or after the process of step S614 is executed, it is determined in step S615 whether an open command has been received. If the release command has been received, in step S616, the display-side MPU 122 recognizes that the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 22 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. The release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S615, or after the process of step S616 is executed, it is determined in step S617 whether a close command has been received. If the close command has been received, in step S618, the display side MPU 122 is notified to the display side MPU 122 in order to make the display side MPU 122 recognize that the special electric prize winning device 22 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. Send a close command. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S617, or after the processing in step S618 is executed, it is determined in step S619 whether an ending command has been received. If an ending command has been received, an ending handling process is executed in step S620. In the ending handling process, the content of the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the lottery mode is executed. To do. In this case, when the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for allowing the player to recognize that the high probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time, and after the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the effect including the content for allowing the player to recognize that the low probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

  In the subsequent step S621, an ending command corresponding to the processing result in step S620 is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S619, or after the process of step S621 is executed, it is determined in step S622 whether a notification command is received. When the notification command is received, it means that an event that should be notified, such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10, has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and in order to perform the notification, In S623, the light emission data reading process is executed, and in step S624, the sound output data reading process is executed. The contents of each reading process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S625, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S622, or after the processing of step S625 is executed, it is determined in step S626 whether a release command has been received. If the cancel command has been received, this means that an event to be notified such as an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been cancelled, and therefore, in order to cancel the notification that has already been performed, step S627 is performed. To execute the release setting process. Specific contents of the cancellation setting process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S628, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 122. The processing contents of the display side MPU 122 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S626, or after executing the process of step S628, the other corresponding process is executed in step S629, and then the corresponding process is terminated. In other processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command is received. If the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 122.

  Demo display means that a predetermined start waiting period for demo start (for example, 0.1 sec) has passed without the start of a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation that is not in the open / close execution mode. In this case, or after the power supply to the main MPU 92 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a start waiting period for starting a demonstration (for example, 3 sec. ) Starts in the symbol display device 31. In the demonstration display, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying a displayed image. Further, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of display side MPU 122>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 122 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 125 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 125 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display-side MPU 122 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, so that the display-side MPU 122 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S701, command analysis processing is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the display side RAM 124 are analyzed. In a succeeding step S702, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result in the step S701. If a new command has been received, command response processing is executed in step S703.

  In the command handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, it is first determined in step S801 whether a stop result command and a pattern command have been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display-side ROM 123 and written to the display-side RAM 124 in step S802, and then this command is supported. The process ends.

  The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game effect on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the current game round effect is defined.

  The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the pattern data table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration time of the target game times is set. Corresponding to each pointer information, the contents of the task are set. Information, command output presence / absence information, and additional data information are set.

  The task content information is information set to display a video corresponding to the current game round, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information is set as additional data, In the frame, an image corresponding to information on the contents of the task is displayed. Information on the contents of the task includes information on parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 125 to perform a drawing instruction in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing.

  Specifically, with respect to the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “200”. , “300” pointer information is set to the end of the notice effect, “400” pointer information is set to the normal reach start data, and “700” pointer information is set to the super reach start time. The data at the start of the definite effect is set in the pointer information “1000”, and the data at the end of the variation is set in the pointer information “1400”. Each piece of pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of a command output from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 and the type of the command. The display-side MPU 122 outputs a command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, so that the first light-emitting unit group 71, the second light-emitting unit group 72, the third light-emitting unit group 73, and the like emit light. It is possible to execute the effect of light according to the contents of the image at the section, to allow the speaker section 45 to execute the effect of sound output according to the contents of the image, and further, the curtain plate movable unit 51 and the disk movable unit 61a. , 61b and the like can be performed according to the content of the image.

  For the pattern data table shown in FIG. 18, specifically, command data is set for pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of variation is set in the task contents. Therefore, at the start of the change of game times, light emission control and sound output control are started in the sound light side MPU 112 based on command transmission from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112. In addition, in the contents of the task, from the pointer information in which each of the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of super reach, the data at the start of the final effect and the data at the end of the variation is set Also, the pointer information at the timing before the number of frames (the number of pointers) for pre-transmission, specifically, the pointer information of “198”, “398”, “698”, “998”, “1398” Command data is set. Therefore, command transmission from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound light-side MPU 112 is performed in advance for the break timings other than the start of the game time fluctuation, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 and the light emission control are performed at these break timings. It is possible to completely synchronize the sound output control and the contents of the drive control of the movable object.

  The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when a notification execution instruction is given. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image display is performed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. Made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S803 whether a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, after executing the final stop setting process in step S804, the command response process ends. In the final stop setting process, a process of reading a data table for stationary display corresponding to the current game round from the display ROM 123 and writing it to the display RAM 124 until the last stop display period has elapsed. Run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S805 whether an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, in step S806, an opening data table corresponding to the opening command is read from the display-side ROM 123 and written in the display-side RAM 124, and then the command-corresponding process ends.

  The opening data table is to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for is defined. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, in the opening data table, not only the information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for transmitting commands to the optical side MPU 112 is set.

  However, in the opening data table, the contents of effects during each round game and during the interval period between round games are determined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data in the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until the corresponding round game is finished, and similarly, the data in the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. The range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched in response to reception of an open command or a close command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether either an open command or a close command has been received. If any command has been received, the setting process at the time of opening and closing is executed in step S808, and then the command handling process is terminated. In the opening / closing setting process, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the contents of the received command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S807, it is determined in step S809 whether an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, in step S810, the ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display ROM 123 and written in the display RAM 124, and then the command handling process is terminated.

  The ending data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, in the ending data table, not only the information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for transmitting commands to the optical side MPU 112 is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S809, this command response processing ends after another response processing is executed in step S811.

  In the separate handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is first determined in step S901 whether a notification command has been received. If the notification command has been received, in step S902, the notification data setting processing is executed, and then the individual response processing ends. In the notification data setting process, notification data corresponding to the notification content included in the current notification command is written as additional data (see FIG. 18) of the currently set data table. Thereby, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for game times and the effect image for the opening / closing execution mode. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S903 whether a release command has been received. If a release command has been received, after performing a notification data clear process in step S904, the corresponding process is terminated. In the notification data clear process, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table at present Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type that is the cancellation target is canceled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, operation system handling processing is executed in step S905. Although details will be described later in the operation system corresponding processing, processing corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 is executed. Thereafter, in step S906, the other handling process is executed, and then the corresponding handling process is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, a data table for performing a demo display is read from the display side ROM 123 and displayed on the display side RAM 124. Execute the process to write to.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or after the process of step S703 is executed, a pointer update process is executed in step S704. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display-side MPU 122 can grasp the processing necessary to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In subsequent step S705, task processing is executed. In the task processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the currently set data table is a data table corresponding to the operation effect. If it is not the data table corresponding to the operation effect, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the current data table. If there is no additional data, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table in step S1003, and one frame corresponding to the current update timing is read in accordance with the read task data in step S1004. In order to display the image of the minute, the calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. Thereafter, the task process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table, it is determined in step S1005 whether the additional data is additional data for the task data image. . If it is additional data, in step S1006, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table, and in the subsequent step S1007, the current update timing is supported according to the read task data and additional data. In order to display the image for one frame, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. Thereafter, the task process is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step S1006 and step S1007 is performed, the case where the character image of an alert | report is added is mentioned.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1005, the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table in step S1008, and in step S1009, 1 corresponding to the current update timing is read according to the read additional data. In order to display an image for a frame, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. Thereafter, the task process is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step S1008 and step S1009 is performed, when the winning information to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 occurs and the hold information is acquired during the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information is There is a case where an effect indicating that it corresponds to the jackpot result is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the currently set data table is a data table corresponding to the operation effect, the task process is terminated after the task process for the operation effect is executed in step S1010. The contents of the task process for the operation effect will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), after the task process is executed in step S705, in step S706, the command data is stored in the data table in the data output area corresponding to the current pointer information. Determine if it exists. If command data exists, it is command output timing, so command setting processing is executed in step S707.

  In the command setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is a timing corresponding to the execution of the confirmed effect in the symbol display device 31. The finalized effect is an effect for notifying that the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result at a timing before the timing at which the stop result is displayed. There are a plurality of types of execution timings of the finalized effects in the symbol display device 31. For example, there are timings during execution of the notice display, timings during execution of normal reach, and timings during execution of super reach. In the data table of FIG. 18, a confirmed effect in the symbol display device 31 is set as a timing during the execution of super reach.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the confirmation processing command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S1102, and then this setting process ends. The confirmation execution command includes information indicating that a confirmation effect is performed in the symbol display device 31. In addition, the confirmation execution command includes information indicating how many frames from the output timing of the command the confirmation effect should start. Thereby, even if the confirmation execution command is transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the confirmed effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the confirmed effect in the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting unit groups 71 to 71. 73 and the confirmed effect in the speaker unit 45 can be started.

  The fixed execution command is set so that the output trigger is one time at the maximum in one pattern data table. Thereby, it is prevented that the fixed effect is generated a plurality of times in the symbol display device 31 in one game time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a fixed execution command can be output a plurality of times in one pattern data table may be adopted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, operation system setting processing is executed in step S1103. Although details will be described later in the operation system setting process, a process for transmitting a command is executed according to a data table corresponding to the operation effect. After that, in step S1104, after executing other command transmission processing, this setting processing ends.

  In other command transmission processes, a command indicating that the game times should be started, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, and that super reach should be started A command, a command indicating that the change should be ended, a command indicating that the presentation in the opening / closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the presentation of the round game should be started, and a presentation of the interval between round games should be started A command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in accordance with each timing.

  In this case, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the production in the opening / closing execution mode should be started, round The command indicating that the production of the game should be started, the command indicating that the production of the interval between round games should be started, and the command indicating that the production of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of the production. include.

  In addition, a command indicating that a notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that variation should be ended, and a round game effect are provided. The command indicating that it should be started includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command the target effect should be started. Thereby, even if each command is transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the target effect, the sound light side MPU 112 synchronizes with the start of the target effect in the symbol display device 31, and various light emitting units. It is possible to start a target effect in the groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 16), when a negative determination is made in step S706, or after executing the process of step S707, the V interrupt process is executed after executing the drawing list output process in step S708. Exit.

  In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 125. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP 125 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 127 according to this drawing list. The VDP 125 outputs a signal to the symbol display device 31 in accordance with the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 31.

<Display-side command handling processing of the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the display side command response process executed in step S504 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the sound light side MPU 112 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the display side command handling process.

  First, in step S1201, a command indicating that an effect of game times should be started, a command indicating that an effect of opening / closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that an effect of an interval between round games should be started, and an ending It is determined whether or not any of a command indicating that the presentation is to be started and a command indicating that the demonstration display is to be started is received. If any of these commands is received, in step S1202, the light emission data reading process is executed and the sound output data reading process is executed. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the corresponding effect has already been executed in the symbol display device 31, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data and the sound output data read in step S1202 is performed. Will start immediately. The light emission data reading process and the sound output data reading process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether a fixed execution command has been received from the display-side MPU 122. If the confirmation execution command has been received, in step S1208, the light emission data reading process at the time of the confirmed effect and the sound output data reading process at the time of the confirmed effect are executed. The contents of these reading processes will be described later in detail. As described above, by executing the reading process of the light emission data and the sound output data, the finalized effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are subsequently executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not a command to start super reach is received from the display-side MPU 122. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, a big hit result is generated in the current game round by confirming the game result information stored in the retained data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114 in step S1205. It is determined whether or not to do. If a jackpot result occurs, in step S1206, a lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a confirmed effect is executed. In the lottery process, a lottery process is performed so that if the result is a low-accuracy big hit result, the finalized effect is won with a probability of 1/20. Execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process for the finalizing effect is not limited to the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the finalizing effect. Good. Thereafter, in step S1207, it is determined whether or not the confirmed effect has been won. If the confirmed effect has been won, in step S1208, the light emission data reading process at the confirmed effect and the sound output data at the confirmed effect are read. Read processing is executed. The contents of these reading processes will be described later in detail. As described above, by executing the reading process of the light emission data and the sound output data, the finalized effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are subsequently executed.

  On the other hand, if a command indicating that super reach should be started has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S1204 and the processing in step S1208 is not executed. Even if a command indicating that super reach is to be started is received, if the current game round is not a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S1205 and the process of step S1208 is performed. Do not execute. Even if the current game round is a big hit result, a negative determination is made in step S1207 and the process in step S1208 is not executed even if the final game lottery process is missed.

  Here, when the confirmed effect is executed in the symbol display device 31, the confirmed effect is executed in the symbol display device 31 while the command data of the confirmed execution command is set in the pattern data table. In the case where the final effect can be executed in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, the command data of the corresponding command is not set in the pattern data table. Instead, the timing at which the definite effect is executed only in these various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is set as the start time of super reach, and a command indicating that super reach should be started is displayed. It is determined whether or not the determined effect should be executed in the sound light side MPU 112 in response to transmission from the side MPU 122. By adopting such a configuration, it is not necessary to set command data indicating the execution timing in the pattern data table for the finalized effect that is not executed in the symbol display device 31, so that the data capacity of the pattern data table is reduced. In addition, the design is facilitated.

  On the other hand, when a command indicating that the super reach is to be started is transmitted from the display side MPU 122, it is determined whether or not the game time of this time is a jackpot result in the sound side MPU 112. On the condition that the game time is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 determines execution of the selective finalizing effect that is not linked. As a result, in the configuration in which the data capacity of the pattern data table is reduced and the setting is facilitated as described above, it is possible to prevent a definite effect from being executed in a game round that does not result in a jackpot.

  In addition, even if the game number is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 is not determined to execute the selective finalizing effect that is not interlocked unless the finalizing effect is won in the finalizing lottery process. Thereby, in the said structure, it becomes possible to give irregularity about execution of a definite effect.

  Furthermore, when a finalized effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, execution of the finalized effects in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 is determined without executing a finalized lottery process. Thereby, it is suppressed that deviation about execution of a definite effect between the symbol display device 31, various light emission part groups 71-73, and the speaker part 45 arises.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, a negative determination is made in step S1205, a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1208 is executed, the moving object is determined in step S1209. It is determined whether it corresponds to the operation start timing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, in step S1210, the movable object data corresponding to the current operation start timing is read from the movable object data group 153 of the sound light side ROM 113, and the movable object of the sound light side RAM 114 is read. Write to the data area 164. Although detailed description is omitted, the movable object data is read, so that the movable object control process (step S507) after the next time in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is referred to FIGS. The processing for causing the various operations to be performed as described above is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or after the processing in step S1210 is executed, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not it is the update timing of the light emission data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, a light emission data read process is executed in step S1212. In this case, since the process of starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not been executed yet, the execution control of the effect using the light emission data read in step S1212 is performed. It will be started in synchronization with the start of. The light emission data reading process will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1211, or after the processing in step S1212 is executed, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not it is the update timing of the sound output data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, a sound output data read process is executed in step S1214. In this case, since the process for starting the image display of the effect corresponding to the update timing has not yet been executed, the execution control of the effect using the sound output data read out in step S1214 is the image of the corresponding effect. It is started in synchronization with the start of display. The sound output data reading process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S1202 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1213, or when the process of step S1214 is executed, it is determined at step S1215 whether or not an operation effect command is received. . If an operation effect command has not been received, the display side command handling process is terminated. If an operation effect command has been received, after performing the operation effect handling process in step S1216, the display side command handling process is terminated.

<Light emission control in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

  The sound light side MPU 112 uses the light emission data group 151 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 113 when performing light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. In this use, a part of the light emission data group 151 is read into the light emission data area 162 provided in the display side RAM 124 and used. The light emission data group 151 and the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the light emission data group 151, and FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the light emission data area 162. FIGS. 24A to 24D and FIG. 25 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of each data included in the light emission data group 151.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the light emission data group 151 includes a palette data group 151a, a start position data group 151b, a total time data group 151c, a duration data group 151d, and a list data group 151e. A group data group 151f and a data selection table 151g exist.

  The palette data group 151a includes a large number of palette data indicating the emission color switching pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24A, in the palette data 0, a switching pattern by two emission colors is defined. Specifically, a pattern for switching to the white emission color next to the blue emission color is defined, and if the state where the palette data 0 is selected continues, the white emission color is followed by the blue emission. It will return to the color. Accordingly, in the palette data 0, a light emission color switching pattern of blue → white → blue → white → blue →... Is defined.

  In addition, the palette data 1 defines a switching pattern based on five emission colors, and the palette data 2 defines a switching pattern based on three emission colors. However, in the pallet data 1, one cycle of the switching pattern is defined as a pattern for displaying the set five emission colors once, whereas in the pallet data 2, the switching pattern 1 is set. The circumference is defined as a pattern for displaying at least one of the set three emission colors twice or more. Specifically, the palette data 1 defines a light emission color switching pattern of red → blue → green → yellow → white → red → blue → green →... A light emission color switching pattern of red → green → blue → green → blue → red → blue → red →... Is defined. There are a large number of palette data other than the palette data 0 to 2 described above.

  In each pallet data, sequential identification information is defined on a one-to-one basis for each emission color data to be switched. The identification information corresponds to start position data indicating from which light emission color to start light emission control when light emission control of one LED 71a to 73a is started using palette data.

  The start position data group 151b includes a target when the light emission color is switched using one of the palette data for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 to be light emission controlled. There are a large number of start position data indicating from which light emission color sequence the light emission control is to be started from among a series of light emission colors defined in the palette data. Here, when the sound light side MPU 112 performs the light emission control of the respective light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the palette data and the start position data are basically set in units of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. In this case, the start position data is data indicating the start position of the light emission color for each of the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, while the LEDs 71a to 73a are between the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The numbers are different. Therefore, the start position data is individually set for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 having a different number of LEDs 71a to 73a.

  The start position data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Start position data 0 and start position data 1 shown in FIG. 24B are examples of start position data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 in which 16 LEDs 72a exist. In each of the start position data 0 and the start position data 1, the start position number is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the bits 0 to 15. In this case, each of bit 0 to bit 15 corresponds to one of the first LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a among the 16 LEDs 72a. Then, when starting the effect of switching the emission color in each LED 72a, the emission color in the order corresponding to the start position number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the palette data to be used, and the specified emission color The luminescent colors are switched sequentially.

  For example, when the start position data 0 is applied to the pallet data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 start from white, and the ninth LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a. Starts from blue. On the other hand, when the start position data 1 is applied to the pallet data 0, the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 start from blue, and the ninth LED 72a to the sixteenth LED 72a. Starts with white.

  The total time data group 151c includes a lot of total time data that can specify the total time for which one pallet data is used. For example, when the time required for one cycle of the selected pallet data switching pattern is shorter than the total time, the switching pattern is repeated until the total time elapses.

  In the duration data group 151d, there are a lot of duration data that make it possible to specify the duration of the state in which one emission color is turned on when the emission color is switched according to the selected palette data. For example, when 2 sec duration data is selected in the situation where the palette data 0 in FIG. 24 (a) is selected, the state in which the emission color is maintained in blue for 2 sec in one LED and the emission color is white The state of being maintained for 2 seconds is repeated.

  A large number of list data exists in the list data group 151e. In the case of using a plurality of pallet data simultaneously for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, except that one pallet data is basically used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. The types of the plurality of palette data are defined as one list data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24C, in the list data 0, palette data 0, palette data 1, and palette data 2 are set as palette data to be used. In the list data 1, palette data 10, palette data 11, palette data 12, and palette data 13 are set as palette data to be used.

  In each list data, a sequential list number is defined on a one-to-one basis with respect to palette data to be used. The list number uses any pallet data for each LED 71a to 73a when selecting the pallet data to be used for each LED 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 using the list data. It corresponds to the specified data indicating whether or not.

  The group data group 151f includes a large number of group data. In the group data, when list data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, each LED 71a to 73a included in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 has each palette set in the list data. Data indicating which of the data is used is set. Here, the group data is data that individually indicates the palette data to be used for the LEDs 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, while the number of LEDs 71a to 73a among the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is as follows. It is different. Therefore, the group data is individually set for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 having a different number of LEDs 71a to 73a.

  The group data will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Group data 0 and group data 1 shown in FIG. 24D are examples of group data applied to the second light emitting unit group 72 in which 16 LEDs 72a exist. In each of the group data 0 and the group data 1, a list number is defined in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the bits 0 to 15. In this case, each of bit 0 to bit 15 corresponds to one of the first LED 72a to the 16th LED 72a among the 16 LEDs 72a. When selecting the palette data to be used for each LED 72a, the palette data in the order corresponding to the list number set in the corresponding bit is specified from the list data to be used, and the specified palette data is used. To do.

  For example, when the group data 0 is applied to the list data 0, the palette data 0 is selected as the use target from the first LED 72a to the eighth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and from the ninth LED 72a to 16th. Up to the second LED 72a, the palette data 1 is selected as an object to be used. On the other hand, when the group data 1 is applied to the list data 1, the pallet data 10 is selected as a use target from the first LED 72a to the fourth LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72, and the fifth LED 72a to 8 The pallet data 11 is selected as the use target up to the thirty-second LED 72a, the pallet data 12 is selected as the use target from the ninth LED 72a to the twelfth LED 72a, and the pallet data 13 from the thirteenth LED 72a to the sixteenth LED 72a. Is selected for use.

  The data selection table 151g is data in which a combination of data used in the light emission control of each light emitting unit group 71 to 73 is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, in the data selection table 151g, request numbers used for specifying combinations of data to be used are set for the number of types of the combinations. Correspondingly, the type of pallet data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, and the type of group data are set.

  However, as already described, one pallet data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, with the exception that a plurality of palettes are used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Data is used simultaneously. In the data selection table 151g, a request number corresponding to the basic combination and a request number corresponding to the exception combination are individually set. Specifically, the request numbers 0 to 10 and the like correspond to basic combinations, and the basic combinations include the type of pallet data, the type of start position data, the type of total time data, and the duration data. A type is defined, and a list data type and a group data type are not defined. On the other hand, the request numbers 120 to 130 and the like correspond to exception combinations. The exception combinations include the type of start position data, the type of total time data, the type of duration data, the type of list data, The type of group data is defined, and the type of palette data is not defined.

  Next, the light emission data area 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the light emission data area 162, each data included in the combination specified using the request number is read from the data selection table 151g, and light emission data is created using each data. The light emission data corresponds to a part of an effect of one game time when used for game times, and a part of an effect of one opening / closing execution mode when used for an opening / closing execution mode. It corresponds. On the other hand, when used for notification, it corresponds to the entire notification.

  Various types of light emission data are created in the light emission data area 162, and these light emission data are stored in different areas in the light emission data area 162 for each predetermined section. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23B, the light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c.

  The base area 162a stores light emission data for normal performance. The situation in which the light data for normal production is used includes, for example, a situation in which no notice display or reach display is performed when a game is played on the symbol display device 31. In the base area 162a, areas corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are provided on a one-to-one basis, and correspond to the respective light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The normal production light emission data is stored separately.

  In the base area 162a, for example, if the light emission data is for game times, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game time. Among them, the execution of the light emission color switching pattern using the single light emission data is repeated. For example, in the case of light emission data for the opening / closing execution mode, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one opening / closing execution mode, and in the one opening / closing execution mode. The execution of the emission color switching pattern using the single emission data is repeated. In these cases, in the combination data for creating the light emission data, data with no time limit is selected as the total time data.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a plurality of light data of normal effects can be set, such as light data of normal effects in the first half and light data of normal effects in the second half, in one game round. Ordinary effect light emission data other than the notice display and the reach display, the normal effect light emission data for the notice display, the normal effect light emission data for the reach display, and the normal effect light emission data for the final stop display. It is good also as a structure by which. In this way, a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data of normal effects can be set during a series of effects may be applied to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The interrupt area 162b stores data used for the light control for the interrupt effect that has priority over the light control for the normal effect. The situation in which the light emission data for the interrupt effect is used includes, for example, a situation in which a notice display or a reach display is performed when the game display is performed on the symbol display device 31. In addition, the situation where the light emission data for the interrupt effect is used includes a situation where the final effect is performed. Further, there is a situation where a promotion effect is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. The interrupt area 162b is provided with an area corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The light emission data for the interrupt effect is stored individually.

  In the interruption area 162b, for example, if it is light emission data for game times, there are a plurality of light emission data that can be stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one game time. During rotation, the plurality of light emission data are appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. For example, in the case of light emission data for the opening / closing execution mode, the plurality of light emission data is appropriately rewritten in each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in one opening / closing execution mode. These rewritings are performed according to the priority between the light emission data. The contents of the rewrite priority will be described in detail later.

  In the notification area 162c, data used for notification light emission control that is prioritized over the light emission control for interrupt effects is stored. The situation where the notification light emission data is used is a case where the occurrence of a notification target event in the pachinko machine 10 is detected and a notification command is transmitted from the main MPU 92. In the notification area 162c, areas corresponding to the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73 are provided on a one-to-one basis, and correspond to the respective light emitting unit groups 71 to 73. The light emission data for notification to be stored is individually stored.

  In the notification area 162c, only one light emission data is stored for each of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 when the notification target event occurs, and in the situation where the notification target event occurs, the one light emission is stored. The execution of the emission color switching pattern using data is repeated. In this case, in the combination data for creating the light emission data, data with no time limit is selected as the total time data. Note that the situation of using the notification light emission data is continued until a cancel command is received from the main MPU 92.

<Reading process of light emission data of sound-side MPU 112>
Next, the light emission data reading process in step S1202, step S1208, and step S1212 in the display side command corresponding process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The light emission data reading process is individually executed for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. In the following description of the light emission data reading process, the process for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described as an example, but the same applies to the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the area to which light emission data is to be written is the notification area 162c. If it is the notification area 162c, in step S1302, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the notification command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the specified type of combination is set. Various corresponding data are read out from the sound side ROM 113. In step S1303, the data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the notification area 162c. In this case, since the same type of data is read regardless of the content of the received notification command, the same light emission data is written. That is, regardless of the notification target event, the second light emitting unit group 72 performs notification in the same manner.

  After that, in step S1304, 1 is set to the light-emitting side notification setting flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 114, and then the present reading process is terminated. The light emission side notification setting flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify whether or not the light emission data exists in the notification area 162c. The state where 1 is set in the notification setting flag on the light emitting side is cleared in the cancel setting process in step S627 of the main command response process (FIG. 15) by receiving the cancel command from the main MPU 92. At this time, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the area to which light emission data is to be written is the base area 162a. If it is the base area 162a, in step S1306, the type of various data combinations corresponding to the request number included in the command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the type of the specified combination is supported. The various data thus read are read out from the sound side ROM 113. In step S1307, the data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the base area 162a. Thereafter, the reading process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the light emission data to be written this time corresponds to a confirmed effect. If it corresponds to the confirmed effect, in step S1309, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number for the current confirmed effect is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the type of the specified combination is supported. The various data thus read are read out from the sound side ROM 113. In step S1310, the data development processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. Thereafter, in step S1311, the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to 1, and the light emission side priority data corresponding to the light emission data for the definite effect is read from the sound light side ROM 113 and the sound light side is read. After writing to the RAM 114, the reading process is terminated.

  The interrupt setting flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify whether or not the light emission data exists in the interrupt area 162b. The light emission side priority data already exists when there is an instruction to write new light emission data to the interrupt area 162b in a situation where the light emission data already exists in the interrupt area 162b. This is data for determining the priority when determining whether to use the light emission data as the light emission data for interruption as it is or to use the light emission data newly instructed for writing as the light emission data for interruption. For the light emission side priority data, the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect has the highest priority, and after that, for the effect for game play, the light emission data with higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect has priority. As for the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the light emission data corresponding to the promotion effect is set to have a higher priority.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the light emission side priority data P1 corresponding to the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b is read in step S1312, and the current writing is performed in step S1313. The emission side priority data P2 corresponding to the instructed emission data is read. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not P2> P1, so that the light emission data for which writing is instructed this time has priority over the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b. Determine whether the degree is high.

  If no light emission data is set in the current interrupt area 162b, an affirmative determination is made in step S1314, and the light emission data for which writing has been instructed this time is written in the interrupt area 162b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1314, it means that the light emission data set in the current interrupt area 162b has a higher priority. Therefore, the present reading process is terminated without writing the emission data for which writing is instructed this time to the interrupt area 162b.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1314, it means that the light emission data for which writing is instructed this time has a higher priority. Therefore, in step S1315, the type of combination of various data corresponding to the request number included in the command received this time is specified from the data selection table 151g, and the various types of data corresponding to the specified type of combination are stored in the sound-side ROM 113. Read from. In step S1316, data read processing is executed using the read various data, and the light emission data is written in the interrupt area 162b. Thereafter, in step S1317, the interrupt setting flag provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to 1, and the light emission side priority data corresponding to the light emission data newly written this time is read from the sound light side ROM 113 and the sound light is read. After writing to the side RAM 114, the reading process is terminated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing data expansion processing activated in the case of steps S1303, S1307, S1310, and S1316.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether the data to be expanded is a basic combination. If it is a basic combination, the value of the creation target bit provided in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to “0” in step S1402. As a result, the first LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is a target for creating light emission data.

  In the subsequent step S1403, the start position number of the creation target bit is acquired from the start position data read corresponding to the request number. In step S1404, the switching pattern is read with reference to the start position number acquired in step S1403 by referring to the pallet data read corresponding to the request number.

  In subsequent step S1405, the duration data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1406, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set. Here, the sound light side MPU 112 is configured to execute the light emission control process by the timer interruption process (FIG. 14) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. In each processing time of the light emission control process, 1 pointer information of the light emission data is set. Update. Accordingly, in step S1405 and step S1406, conversion to the pointer information is performed so that the quotient value obtained when the duration data and the total time data are divided by 4 msec becomes the final pointer information.

  Incidentally, when data without time restriction is set as the total time data, it is assumed that the total time data does not exist, and data for one cycle of the emission color switching pattern is created as the emission data. On the other hand, when data other than data with no time limit is set as the total time data, that is, data with a time limit is set, the last pointer information and the time corresponding to the total time data have passed. Thus, the emission color switching pattern for the total time data is set. In this case, if the total time data exceeds the time corresponding to one cycle of the emission color switching pattern in relation to the duration data, the emission color switching pattern exceeding one cycle is set. It becomes.

  By executing the processing of steps S1403 to S1406, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current value of the creation target bit is created. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the creation target bit in step S1407, the creation target of the light emission data is updated to the next sequential LED. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1408, light emission data is created by executing the processing of steps S1403 to S1407 for the LED corresponding to the updated value of the creation target bit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1408, in step S1409, each light emission data created this time is written in the area to be written among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c. Thereafter, the data expansion process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, the value of the creation target bit in the sound light side RAM 114 is set to “0”. As a result, the first LED 72A of the second light emitting unit group 72 is a target for creating light emission data.

  In subsequent step S1411, the list number of the creation target bit is acquired from the group data read in correspondence with the request number. In step S1412, the pallet data corresponding to the list number acquired in step S1411 is read from the sound light side ROM 113 by referring to the list data read corresponding to the request number.

  Thereafter, in step S1413, the start position number of the creation target bit is acquired from the start position data read in correspondence with the request number, and in step S1414, the palette data read in step S1412 is referred to. A switching pattern is read with reference to the start position number acquired in step S1413. In subsequent step S1415, the continuous time data is converted into pointer information and set, and in step S1416, the total time data is converted into pointer information and set.

  By executing the processing of step S1411 to step S1416, light emission data for the LED corresponding to the current value of the creation target bit is created. In particular, in this case, the combination data read corresponding to the request number is an exceptional combination, and the light emission data is created using the group data and the list data. Therefore, each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 is generated. It is possible to create light emission data based on different pallet data for each and diversify the light emission patterns.

  After that, by adding 1 to the value of the creation target bit in step S1417, the creation target of the light emission data is updated to the LED in the next order. In step S1418, it is determined whether the value of the creation target bit exceeds the number of LEDs included in the second light emitting unit group 72.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1418, light emission data is created by executing the processing in steps S1411 to S1416 for the LED corresponding to the updated value of the creation target bit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1418, in step S1419, each light emission data created this time is written in the area to be written among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c. Thereafter, the data expansion process is terminated.

  An example of the light emission data created when the data expansion process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 shows light emission data created when the palette data 0 of FIG. 24A and the start position data 0 of FIG. 24B are applied to the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72. FIG. It is an example of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a of the light emission data area 162. In this case, since the luminescent color is set twice in the palette data 0, the pointer information is set as a serial number so that the number corresponding to twice the time corresponding to the duration data becomes the final pointer information. Is done. More specifically, in the palette data 0, the light emission color switching pattern of blue → white is set and 4 sec is set as the duration data, so that the final pointer information becomes “1999”. Pointer information is set by serial number. In addition, the LED 72a corresponding to bit 0 to bit 7 generates light emission data for 4 seconds after the blue light emission color continues for 4 seconds, and the LED 72a corresponding to bit 8 to bit 15 is a white light emission data. After the emission color is continued for 4 seconds, the emission data for generating the blue emission color for 4 seconds is created.

<Light emission control processing of sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the light emission control process of step S505 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The light emission control process is executed individually for each of the first light emitting unit group 71, the second light emitting unit group 72, and the third light emitting unit group 73. In the following description of the light emission control process, the process for the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described as an example, but the same applies to the first light emitting unit group 71 and the third light emitting unit group 73.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the notification setting flag of the sound side RAM 114. If “1” is set in the notification setting flag, in step S1502, the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 emit light based on data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the notification area 162c. Control.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not “1” is set in the interrupt setting flag of the sound side RAM 114. If “1” is set in the interrupt setting flag, in step S1504, the LEDs 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 emit light based on the data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the interrupt area 162b. Control.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, light emission control is performed on each LED 72a of the second light emitting unit group 72 based on data corresponding to the current pointer information in the light emission data of the base area 162a in step S1505.

  That is, the light emission data can be simultaneously stored in each of the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162. However, the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c Of these, the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c has the highest priority in light emission control. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize the notification over the execution of the production, and it is possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the notification target event such as an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In the case where the light emission data is not stored in the notification area 162c, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is prioritized next in the light emission control. Thereby, priority is given to the execution of the finalized effect and the effect with high expectation, and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the effect in the light emission part groups 71-73.

  After the processing of step S1502, step S1504, or step S1505 is executed, the pointer information is the last pointer among the light emission data stored in the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b, and the notification area 162c in step S1506. It is determined whether or not the light emission data that is information exists. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, it is determined in step S1507 whether the area that is the final pointer information is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c. If it is the base area 162a or the notification area 162c, the pointer information of the light emission data that is the final pointer information is returned to the start pointer information in step S1508. By executing the return process, the pointer information of the light emission data that is the return target is repeatedly updated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1507, the interrupt setting flag in the sound light side RAM 114 is cleared to “0” in step S1509, and clear processing for the interrupt area 162b is executed. That is, the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is cleared by becoming the last pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1506, if the process of step S1508 is executed, or if the process of step S1509 is executed, then in step S1510, the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b of the light emission data area 162, and The pointer information update process is executed for each of the notification areas 162c. Thereby, in the next processing time of the light emission control process, the light emission control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the light emission data that is the target of the return processing to the start pointer information in step S1508 is not processed. Thereafter, the main light emission control process is terminated.

<State of light emission control>
Next, how light emission control is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 30A shows the execution state of the normal effect, FIG. 30B shows the execution state of the reach effect, FIG. 30C shows the execution state of the final effect, and FIG. FIG. 30 (e) shows whether or not a command indicating that light emission data should be stored in the interrupt area 162b (hereinafter referred to as an interrupt setting command) is received. In the following description, a light emission effect in the second light emitting unit group 72 will be described. Further, in FIG. 30, a light emission control mode that is actually selected is indicated by a surrounding line.

  By storing the light emission data in the base area 162a at the timing of t1, a normal effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. Then, by receiving an interrupt setting command as shown in FIG. 30 (e) at the timing t2, which is the situation where the normal effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the reach effect is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Then, the normal effect is stopped as shown in FIG. 30A, and the reach effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. However, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a even in the situation where the reach effect is performed by performing the light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b. The update will continue.

  Thereafter, an interrupt setting command corresponding to the confirmed effect is received as shown in FIG. 30E at the timing t3 when the reach effect is being executed. Since the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect has the highest priority among the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect is overwritten in the interrupt area 162b, and FIG. As shown in the figure, the definite effect is started in the second light emitting unit group 72. In this case, the light emission data corresponding to the reach effect previously stored in the interrupt area 162b is deleted. Further, even in a situation where a definite effect is being performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b, a pointer to the light emission data stored in the base area 162a. The update will continue.

  Thereafter, an interrupt setting command is received as shown in FIG. 30 (e) at the timing of t4, which is a situation where the finalized effect is being executed. However, since the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the effect instructed by the interrupt setting command is lower than the priority of the light emission data corresponding to the confirmed effect, the interruption area 162b is not overwritten and the confirmed effect is not performed. The light emission data corresponding to is used as it is.

  After that, by receiving a notification command at the timing t5, which is a situation where the finalized effect is being executed, the light emission data corresponding to the notification is stored in the notification area 162c. Thereby, the confirmed effect is stopped as shown in FIG. 30C, and the notification is started in the second light emitting unit group 72 as shown in FIG. However, even in a situation where notification is performed by performing light emission control using the light emission data stored in the notification area 162c, the pointer of the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is updated. , And the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is continued.

  After that, by receiving the release command at the timing of t6, the notification area 162c is cleared and the notification setting flag on the light emission side is cleared to “0”. As a result, the notification is ended as shown in FIG. 30D, and the finalized effect using the light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b is resumed as shown in FIG. 30C. In this case, since the pointer update of the light emission data stored in the interruption area 162b has been continued even in the situation where the notification is being performed, the notification interruption is the light emission mode of the definite effect at the restarted timing. If there is no light emission, it is the same as the light emission mode of the definite effect at this timing. Therefore, even if a notification interruption occurs, the light emission mode of the finalized effect in the second light emitting unit group 72 and the display mode of the finalized effect in the symbol display device 31 can be synchronized after the timing when the notification is released. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, when the finalized effect ends at the timing of t7, the interrupt area 162b is cleared and the interrupt setting flag is cleared to “0”. Thus, the finalized effect is ended as shown in FIG. 30C, and the normal effect using the light emission data stored in the base area 162a is resumed as shown in FIG. And the said normal production is complete | finished at the timing of t8.

<Sound output control in the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the contents of the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described.

  The sound light side MPU 112 uses the sound output data group 152 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 113 when performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45. In this use, a part of the sound output data group 152 is read into the sound output data area 163 provided in the sound light side RAM 114 and used. The sound output data group 152 and the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the sound output data group 152, and FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output data area 163.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the sound output data group 152 includes a variation base data group 152a, a notice effect start time data group 152b, a notice effect end time data group 152c, and a normal reach time data group 152d. , Super reach data group 152e, finalized effect data group 152f, change end data group 152g, notification occurrence data group 152h, opening data group 152i, round data group 152j, and interval data There are at least a group 152k, an ending data group 152l, and a promotion effect data group 152m.

  In the variation base data group 152a, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting music repeated in a situation where no notice display or reach display is performed during game play. The notice effect start time data group 152b includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music from the start of the notice display to the end of the notice display. In the notice effect end time data group 152c, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting the music when the notice display is ended. The normal reach time data group 152d includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music that is repeated in a situation where the normal reach is performed. The super reach data group 152e includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where super reach is performed. The confirmed effect data group 152f includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where the confirmed effect is being performed. The variation end time data group 152g includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting a music piece when the symbol variation display is terminated during the game. In the notification occurrence data group 152h, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting notification sound or sound for notification. In the opening data group 152i, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in a situation where the opening effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The round data group 152j includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music in a situation where an effect during a round game is being performed in the opening / closing execution mode. In the interval data group 152k, there are a plurality of sound output data for outputting a music piece in a situation where an effect during the interval is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The ending data group 152l includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where the ending effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. The promotion effect data group 152m includes a plurality of sound output data for outputting music or sound in a situation where the promotion effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  That is, in the sound output data group 152, sound output data for the entire series of effects that are started at a predetermined trigger such as effects for game times and effects for opening and closing execution modes are not set as they are. In a state in which the sound output data for the entire series of productions is divided for each range in which the progress of the productions in the series production is different (for example, a range in which the type of appearing character is different or a range in which the variation display of the pattern is changed). Is set. A plurality of types of sound output data are set for each divided data. Therefore, when performing an effect for game play or an effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the divided data corresponding to the command transmitted from the main MPU 92 or the display MPU 122 is read, and the sound output control is performed according to the read divided data. Will be done.

  Incidentally, in the state where the sound output data is developed in the sound light side RAM 114, pointer information corresponding to the output duration for one cycle of the music, sound or notification sound set in the sound output data, Output content data corresponding to the pointer information on a one-to-one basis. A signal corresponding to the output content data set corresponding to the pointer information is output to the speaker unit 45, and the content of the signal output is changed in accordance with the update of the pointer information every time the sound is output. Music, sound or notification sound corresponding to the data is output.

  Next, the sound output data area 163 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sound output data area 163 is provided with a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186 so that a plurality of sound output data can be simultaneously read out and controlled. Specifically, 16 pieces of the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 are provided. As a result, even when a new sound output data read command is issued in a situation where sound output control is performed using predetermined sound output data, the predetermined sound output data is read into the sound light side RAM 114. The new sound output data can be read out to the sound light side RAM 114 while maintaining the above. Further, the number of sound output areas 171 to 186 is set to be equal to or greater than the maximum number of sound output data that can be simultaneously read.

<Reading process of sound output data of sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the sound output data reading process in steps S1202, S1208, and S1214 in the display side command handling process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not it is a reading process when a notification command is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, in step S1602, the sound output data corresponding to the content of the received notification command is stored in the notification occurrence data group 152h in the sound output data group 152 of the sound side ROM 113. Read from inside. In step S1603, the read sound output data is stored in the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163, and the sound output data is not stored. Write to the upper area. Thereafter, in step S1604, the sound output side priority data for notification corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1603. Is written into the sound-light side RAM 114 in a state where it can be specified.

  The sound output side priority data indicates whether sound output control is performed for sound output data stored in any sound output area in a situation where sound output data is stored in a plurality of sound output areas 171 to 186. This is data for determining the priority when the optical MPU 112 determines the priority. As for the sound output side priority data, the sound output data corresponding to the notification has the highest priority, and the sound output data corresponding to the confirmed effect has the next highest priority. The sound output data with higher expectation of the jackpot result of the target effect is set to have a higher priority, and the sound output data corresponding to the promotion effect has priority for the effect for the opening / closing execution mode It is set to be high.

  Incidentally, the sound output side priority data corresponds to the priority among the base area 162a, the interrupt area 162b and the notification area 162c in the light emission data area 162, and the light emission side priority data. Thus, the event being executed and the event preferentially executed in the sound output control are configured to be the same. Therefore, the execution contents of the light emission control and the sound output control are the same.

  In a succeeding step S1605, it is determined whether or not the sound output side priority data for notification is already set in the sound light side RAM 114. If it has not been set, this read processing is terminated as it is. If it has already been set, the output start timing adjustment process is executed in step S1606, and then this read process is terminated.

  Here, in the alerting | reporting in the speaker part 45, the alerting | reporting sound or alerting | reporting sound corresponding to every event used as alerting | reporting is output. In other words, in the alarm occurrence data group 152h, sound output data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the event to be notified, and the event to be notified has occurred in duplicate. In some cases, the sound output data for notification corresponding to each event is stored in different sound output areas. In this case, the sound output data for notification is set so that the sound output side priority data has the same priority, and in step S1606, by shifting the output start timing of each sound output data, All the sound output data is set as a target of sound output control. Specifically, the start pointer information is adjusted such that the newly set sound output data for notification becomes the sound output control target following the already set sound output data for notification. In addition, in the situation where the notification state of the pachinko machine 10 is not released, the notification is repeated, but when a plurality of notification sound output data are set, notifications for different events are continued. The output state is repeated.

  Note that the sound output data for notification is cleared when a release command indicating that the notification target event corresponding to the sound output data has been released is received from the main MPU 92. At this time, the sound output side priority data for notification is also cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not there are a plurality of sound output data to be read this time. The speaker unit 45 outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the moving image on the symbol display device 31. However, when a notice display is performed in an effect for game play, the notice display starts and the notice display is displayed. Sounds with different contents are output at the end. On the other hand, the display side MPU 122 does not output a command to the sound light side MPU 112 at each timing, but outputs a command corresponding to the notice display only at a timing corresponding to the start of the notice display. Therefore, when the sound light side MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the notice display, it reads out sound output data corresponding to the start of the notice display and sound output data corresponding to the end of the notice display.

  Specifically, in step S1608, the sound output data on the front side is read out from the sound output data group 152 of the light side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is read in the sound output data area 163 in step S1609. Of the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186, the sound output area in which no sound output data is stored is written in the uppermost area. Thereafter, in step S1610, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1609 can be specified. In this state, it is written in the sound light side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, in step S1611, the rear sound output data is read from the sound output data group 152 of the light-side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is read in the first sound in the sound output data area 163 in step S1612. Of the output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186, the uppermost area among the sound output areas in which no sound output data is stored is written. Thereafter, in step S1613, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound light side ROM 113, and the correspondence with the sound output area to be written in step S1612 can be specified. In this state, it is written in the sound light side RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S1614, “1” is set to the output standby flag provided in the sound side RAM 114, and the output standby area setting process is executed. The output standby flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that there is sound output data that is to be a target of sound output control, and in the output standby area setting process, Data for specifying the sound output area where the standby sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the standby sound output data is set. Thereafter, the reading process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1607, in step S1615, the sound output data corresponding to the current read process is read from the sound output data group 152 of the sound light side ROM 113, and the read sound output data is In step S1616, the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163 are written in the highest area among the sound output areas where no sound output data is stored. Thereafter, in step S1617, the sound output side priority data corresponding to the sound output data read this time is read from the sound side ROM 113, and the correspondence relationship with the sound output area to be written in step S1616 can be specified. In this state, it is written in the sound light side RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S1618, “1” is set to the output standby flag provided in the sound side RAM 114, and the output standby area setting process is executed. The output standby flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 112 to specify that there is sound output data that is to be a target of sound output control, and in the output standby area setting process, Data for specifying the sound output area where the standby sound output data is stored is set, and the output start timing of the standby sound output data is set. Thereafter, the reading process ends.

<Sound output control processing of the sound light side MPU 112>
Next, the sound output control process of step S506 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, among the sound output areas to be updated in the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 in the sound output data area 163 of the sound side RAM 114, the upper (first sound output area 171 is the highest). Each sound output side priority data set in the two sound output areas is read out. Here, the sound output area to be updated is a sound output area in which sound output data is stored, and is a sound output area for which output start timing is not set, that is, not in a standby state for sound output control. This refers to the sound output area. In the following step S1702, which of the read sound output side priority data has a higher priority is specified, and in step S1703, the sound output area on the higher priority side is set as an output area.

  In subsequent step S1704, the sound output side priority data of the next higher-order sound output area is read for the sound output area to be updated, and in step S1705, the sound output side priority data of the output area is read. In step S1706, the priority of the read sound output side priority data that is read out is specified, and in step S1707, the sound output area on the higher priority side is set as an output area. To do.

  Thereafter, in step S1708, it is determined whether or not the sound output side priority data comparison processing has been completed for all the sound output areas to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1708, the processing from step S1704 to step S1707 is repeated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  In step S1709, sound output control is performed on the speaker unit 45 based on data corresponding to the current pointer information in the sound output data stored in the sound output area set in the output area. In this case, in one sound output control process, only one sound output data is subjected to sound output control, and sound output data stored in the other sound output areas to be updated is not subjected to sound output control. That is, the sound output data is set to mute.

  In subsequent step S1710, it is determined whether or not there is sound output data whose pointer information is the final pointer information among the sound output data stored in the sound output area to be updated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1710, it is determined in step S1711 whether or not the sound output data that is the final pointer information is base data or notification occurrence data. If it is base data or notification occurrence data, in step S1712, the pointer information of the sound output data that is the final pointer information is returned to the start pointer information. By executing the return process, the pointer information of the sound output data that is the return target is repeatedly updated.

  Whether the base data or the notification occurrence data is specified is performed using the sound output side priority data. That is, the sound output side priority data can be used not only for comparison of priorities but also for specifying the type of sound output data.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1711, the sound output data that is the final pointer information is cleared in step S1713 and the sound output in the sound output area in which the sound output data is stored is output. The side priority data clear process is executed. That is, the sound output data other than the base data and the notification occurrence data is cleared by becoming the last pointer information.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1710, when the process of step S1712 is executed, or when the process of step S1713 is executed, the first sound output area 171 to the sixteenth sound output area 186 are changed in step S1714. The pointer information update process is executed for each of the areas to be updated. Thereby, in the next processing time of the sound output control process, the sound output control is executed based on the data corresponding to the new pointer information. However, in the update processing of the pointer information, the sound output data that is the target of the return processing to the start pointer information in step S1712 is not processed, and the sound output data that is waiting to be updated is also included. Not subject to processing.

  After that, in step S1715, it is determined whether or not the sound output data that has reached the output start timing is present in the sound output data that is waiting to be updated. If a negative determination is made in step S1715, the real sound output control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1715, the sound output data at the output start timing is updated in step S1716. After adding the target sound output data, the real sound output control process is terminated.

<Execution Execution Control Corresponding to Operation of Effect Operation Device 48>
Next, execution control of an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 (hereinafter also referred to as an operation effect) will be described.

  The operation effect is executed as an effect for game times. That is, it is started when the main MPU 92 executes a winning / no-go determination process based on winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, and the display duration time determined by the main MPU 92 has elapsed. It is executed within the range of the production to be finished. The operation effect is executed at a predetermined probability of the game times that will be the jackpot result, and at a predetermined probability of the game times at which the outlier reach display occurs. The operation effects include a first operation effect in which the curtain plate movable object 52 operates in accordance with the operation of the effect operation device 48, and a second operation effect in which the curtain plate movable object 52 does not operate even if the effect operation device 48 is operated. Is set such that the probability of a jackpot result is higher when the first operation effect occurs than when the second operation effect occurs.

  34 to 36 show an example of a set of pattern data table groups selected when the first operation effect is generated.

  When the first operation effect is generated, a set of pattern data table groups including a plurality of pattern data tables is read from the display ROM 123 to the display RAM 124. As the pattern data table group, there are a base data table shown in FIG. 34, a first branch side data table shown in FIG. 35, and a second branch side data table shown in FIG.

  In the task content information in the base data table, as shown in FIG. 34, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and the data during the operation effective period is set in the pointer information “1000”. Is set. In addition, between the pointer information of “0” and the pointer information of “1000”, data at the start of the notice effect, data at the end of the notice effect, data at the start of normal reach, and data at the start of super reach are set. ing.

  The operation valid period refers to the progress of the subsequent production, the corresponding production corresponding to the fact that the production operation device 48 is operated and the corresponding execution condition is established, and the non-operation corresponding to the fact that the corresponding execution condition is not established. This is a period for deciding which of the corresponding effects is to be distributed. The operation of the effect operation device 48 is validated during the operation effective period, and the corresponding effect is started after the operation effective period based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period, the display effect indicating that the operation effective period is executed in the symbol display device 31 is executed, and the display effect is obtained by referring to the data during the operation effective period and the update data that follows. Is executed. The operation effective period is set as a period during which it is sufficiently possible to operate the effect operating device 48 a specific number of times (specifically, 10 times) described later.

  In the base data table, data is set on the premise that the operation of the rendering operation device 48 that does not satisfy the corresponding execution condition during the operation effective period is not performed. Accordingly, data at the start of the non-corresponding effect is set in the pointer information “1500”. The symbol display device 31 executes the non-corresponding effect by referring to the data at the start of the non-corresponding effect and the subsequent update data.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the operation of the rendering operation device 48 that satisfies the corresponding execution condition is not performed during the first operation effective period, the operation effective period is generated again. Yes. In the base data table, since it is set on the premise that the operation of the rendering operation device 48 that satisfies the corresponding execution condition during the operation effective period is not performed, the pointer information “2000” includes the operation effective period. Is set. By referring to the data during the operation effective period and the subsequent update data, the symbol display device 31 performs a display effect indicating the operation effective period.

  In the base data table, as already described, data is set on the premise that the operation of the rendering operation device 48 that does not satisfy the corresponding execution condition during the operation effective period is not performed. Therefore, data at the start of the non-corresponding effect is set in the pointer information “2500”. The symbol display device 31 executes the non-corresponding effect by referring to the data at the start of the non-corresponding effect and the subsequent update data.

  In the subsequent pointer information of “3000”, data at the start of the adjustment effect is set. The adjustment effect is the same effect as the corresponding effect in a situation where the operation of the effect operating device 48 that satisfies the corresponding execution condition is not performed and the corresponding effect is not executed in any of the two operation effective periods. This is an effect set to let the player confirm the contents. The operation effective period is not set for the adjustment effect, and the corresponding effect is not executed without any operation of the effect operating device 48 that establishes the corresponding execution condition in any operation effective period. The adjustment effect is executed with sufficient conditions. An adjustment effect is executed in the symbol display device 31 by referring to data at the start of the adjustment effect and subsequent update data. In the adjustment effect, the movement of the curtain plate movable object 52 occurs. The execution period of the adjustment effect is set longer than the execution period of the non-corresponding effect.

  In subsequent pointer information of “4000”, data at the end of the change is set. By referring to the data at the end of the change and the subsequent update data, the symbol display device 31 executes a display effect that ends the effect for the game times.

  As the information on the presence / absence of command output in the base data table, command data is set with respect to pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of change is set in the task contents. Therefore, at the start of the change of game times, light emission control and sound output control are started in the sound light side MPU 112 based on command transmission from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112. Also, in the contents of the task, data during the first operation effective period, data at the start of the first non-corresponding effect, data during the second operation effective period, data at the start of the second non-corresponding effect, adjustment Pointer information at a timing before the number of frames for pre-transmission (number of pointers) before each pointer information in which data at the start of production and data at the end of variation are set, specifically, “998”, Command data is set for each pointer information of “1498”, “1998”, “2498”, “2998”, and “3998”. Therefore, command transmission from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound light-side MPU 112 is performed in advance for the break timings other than the start of the game time fluctuation, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 and the light emission control are performed at these break timings. It is possible to completely synchronize the sound output control and the contents of the drive control of the movable object. The additional data information is the same as that of the data table shown in FIG.

  In the first branch side data table, in the situation where the display control based on the base data table is performed, an operation of the effect operating device 48 is performed so as to satisfy the corresponding execution condition during the first operation effective period. Is set as the data when. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the information on the contents of the task in the first branch side data table, data at the start of the corresponding effect is set in the pointer information “1500”. The symbol display device 31 executes the corresponding effect by referring to the data at the start of the corresponding effect and the subsequent update data. The execution period of the corresponding effect is the same as the execution period of the adjustment effect. The content of the corresponding effect in the symbol display device 31 is the same as the content of the adjustment effect in the symbol display device 31. Further, in the corresponding effect, the movement of the curtain plate movable object 52 occurs.

  Subsequent pointer information of “3000” is set with data at the start of an executed effect. An executed effect is to secure an opportunity to execute the corresponding effect and the adjustment effect in a situation where the operation of the effect operation device 48 that satisfies the corresponding execution condition is performed during the operation effective period and the corresponding effect is executed. It is an effect that is executed instead of the corresponding effect and adjustment effect in the remaining period that has been set. An executed effect is executed in the symbol display device 31 by referring to the data at the start of the executed effect and the subsequent update data. The executed effect is set as an effect having continuity with respect to the content of the corresponding effect, and during the period from the end of the corresponding effect until the start of the display effect to end the effect for game times. It is set as a corresponding production. In addition, as the production having continuity, the character or background that appeared in the corresponding production appears as it is after the corresponding production, or the video of the story that is continuous with the story of the video developed in the corresponding production Is an effect that continues after the corresponding effect, and an effect that a character or an image indicating that the corresponding effect has been executed appears after the corresponding effect.

  In subsequent pointer information of “4000”, data at the end of the change is set. By referring to the data at the end of the change and the subsequent update data, the symbol display device 31 executes a display effect that ends the effect for the game times.

  In the information on the presence or absence of command output in the first branch side data table, the data at the start of the corresponding effect, the data at the start of each executed effect, and the data at the end of variation are ahead of each pointer information set. Command data is set with respect to pointer information at a timing before the number of frames (pointer number) for transmission, specifically, pointer information of “1498”, “2998”, and “3998”. The additional data information is the same as that of the data table shown in FIG.

  In the second branch side data table, in the situation where the display control based on the base data table is performed, the operation of the presentation operation device 48 is performed so as to establish the corresponding execution condition during the second operation valid period. Is set as the data when. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the information on the contents of the task in the second branch side data table, data at the start of the corresponding effect is set in the pointer information “2500”. The symbol display device 31 executes the corresponding effect by referring to the data at the start of the corresponding effect and the subsequent update data. The execution period of the corresponding effect, the content of the corresponding effect, and the movement of the curtain plate movable object 52 during the corresponding effect are the same as when the corresponding effect is executed with reference to the first branch side data table.

  In the subsequent pointer information “3500”, data at the time of starting the performed effect is set. An executed effect is executed in the symbol display device 31 by referring to the data at the start of the executed effect and the subsequent update data. The executed effect is set as an effect having continuity with respect to the content of the corresponding effect, and during the period from the end of the corresponding effect until the start of the display effect to end the effect for game times. It is set as a corresponding production.

  In subsequent pointer information of “4000”, data at the end of the change is set. By referring to the data at the end of the change and the subsequent update data, the symbol display device 31 executes a display effect that ends the effect for the game times.

  In the information on the presence / absence of command output in the second branch side data table, the data at the start of the corresponding effect, the data at the start of the executed effect, and the data at the end of the change are sent in advance than the pointer information set therein. Command data is set with respect to pointer information at a timing before the number of trusted frames (number of pointers), specifically, pointer information of “2498”, “3498”, and “3998”. The additional data information is the same as that of the data table shown in FIG.

<Processing executed by display-side MPU 122 regarding operation effects>
Next, the process performed by the display side MPU 122 regarding the operation effect will be described. First, the task process for operational effects will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the task process for the operation effect is executed in step S1010 in the task process (FIG. 20).

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the current data table. If there is no additional data, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table in step S1802, and one frame corresponding to the current update timing is read in accordance with the read task data in step S1803. In order to display the image of the minute, the calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed.

  On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table in step S1804, and the subsequent step S1805 is performed. Then, in accordance with the read task data and additional data, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. In addition, as a case where the process of step S1804 and step S1805 is performed, the case where the character image of an alert | report is added is mentioned.

  When the process of step S1803 is executed or when the process of step S1805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, the current data table is checked to determine whether or not the current pointer information corresponds to the end timing of the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S1806, the task processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, the process proceeds to step S1807.

  In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation number counter provided in the display side RAM 124 is equal to or greater than the specific number of times set as a value of 2 or more, specifically 10 or more. The operation number counter is a counter for measuring the number of operations of the effect operation device 48 during the operation effective period. The value of the operation number counter is updated by an operation system corresponding process in the display side MPU 122.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the operation system handling process. The operation system handling process is executed in step S905 in another handling process (FIG. 19).

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the sound light side MPU 112. As described above, the operation generation command is a command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112 to the display side MPU 122 when the effect operation device 48 is operated. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the operation system handling process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902.

  In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current pointer information corresponds to the operation valid period by checking the current data table. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the operation system handling process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, 1 is added to the value of the operation number counter of the display side RAM 124. In the subsequent step S1904, additional data at the time of operation is set in the pointer information to be referred to from the next time on in the current data table. As a result, an effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48 is displayed on the symbol display device 31. Thereafter, in step S1905, “1” is set to the operation presence flag provided in the display side RAM 124, and then the operation system corresponding process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the task process for operation effects (FIG. 37), if it is determined in step S1807 that the value of the operation number counter is less than 10, it is determined that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied, and this task is performed as it is. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operation number counter is 10 or more, it is determined that the corresponding execution condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1808, it is determined whether or not the current corresponding execution condition is satisfied during the first operation valid period. If the error occurred during the first operation valid period, the first-stage data table change process is executed in step S1809, and then this task process ends. In the first-stage data table change process, the data table to be referred to is changed from the base data table to the first branch side data table. On the other hand, if the establishment of the current corresponding execution condition has occurred during the second operation valid period, the task process ends after executing the second-stage data table change process in step S1810. . In the data table change process at the second stage, the data table to be referred to is changed from the base data table to the second branch side data table.

  Next, the operation system setting process executed by the display side MPU 122 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation system setting process is executed in step S1103 in the command setting process (FIG. 21).

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the operation presence flag of the display side RAM 124. If “1” is set in the operation presence flag, an operation valid command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S2002, and then the operation system setting process ends. When the process of step S2002 is executed, the operation presence flag is cleared to “0”.

  If “1” is not set in the operation presence flag, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the current pointer information is a pre-transfer timing corresponding to an unsupported effect or an executed effect in the current data table. judge. If it is the timing, after transmitting a non-specific effect start command to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S2004, the operation system setting process is terminated. The non-specific effect start command corresponds to information indicating whether the current operation effect corresponds to the first operation effect or the second operation effect, and to the non-corresponding effect or the executed effect. And information indicating which execution timing the corresponding production is at is included.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the current pointer information is the pre-transfer timing corresponding to the corresponding effect or adjustment effect in the current data table. If it is not the timing, the operation system setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the timing, after transmitting a specific effect start command to the sound light side MPU 112 in step S2006, the operation system setting process is terminated. The specific effect start command indicates information indicating whether the current operation effect corresponds to the first operation effect or the second operation effect, and indicates whether the corresponding effect or the adjustment effect is supported. Information and information indicating at which execution timing the corresponding production is included are included.

<Processing executed by the sound-side MPU 112 regarding the operation effect>
Next, the operation effect corresponding process executed by the sound light side MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation effect handling process is executed in step S1216 in the display side command handling process (FIG. 22).

  First, in step S <b> 2101, it is determined whether an operation valid command is received from the display side MPU 122. If the operation valid command has been received, the light emission data reading process corresponding to the operation valid command is executed in step S2102, and the sound output data corresponding to the operation valid command is read in step S2103. After executing the reading process, the operation effect corresponding process is terminated. The operation valid command is a command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 during the operation valid period. When the sound light side MPU 112 receives the operation valid command, the sound light side MPU 112 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the command and a sound output effect corresponding to the light emission effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not a non-specific effect start command has been received from the display side MPU 122. If a non-specific effect start command has been received, in step S2105, a light emission data read process corresponding to the non-specific effect start command is executed, and in step S2106, the non-specific effect start command is received. After executing the corresponding sound output data reading process, the operation effect corresponding process is terminated. The non-specific effect start command is a command transmitted in advance when a non-corresponding effect or an executed effect is started on the symbol display device 31. When the sound light side MPU 112 receives a non-specific effect start command, the sound light side MPU 112 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the command and a sound output effect corresponding to the light effect. In this case, the content of the light emission effect to be executed and the content of the sound output effect differ depending on whether the command is an instruction for the first operation effect or the second operation effect. The content of the light emission effect to be executed and the content of the sound output effect differ depending on whether the command is a command to indicate the content of the light emission effect to be executed, depending on which timing the specified effect corresponds to And the contents of the sound output effect are different.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not a specific effect start command has been received from the display-side MPU 122. If the specific effect start command has not been received, the operation effect corresponding process is terminated as it is.

  If the specific effect start command is received, the light emission data reading process corresponding to the specific effect start command is executed in step S2108, and the sound output data corresponding to the specific effect start command in step S2109. The reading process is executed. The specific effect start command is a command transmitted in advance when the corresponding effect or the adjustment effect is started on the symbol display device 31. When the sound light side MPU 112 receives the specific effect start command, the sound light side MPU 112 executes the light emission effect corresponding to the command and the sound output effect corresponding to the light effect. In this case, the content of the light emission effect to be executed and the content of the sound output effect differ depending on whether the command is an instruction to indicate the first operation effect or the second operation effect, and further, which of the corresponding effect and the adjustment effect is indicated. The content of the light emission effect to be executed and the content of the sound output effect are different depending on the command to be executed, and the content and sound of the light emission effect to be executed are also determined depending on which timing the indicated effect corresponds to. The content of the output effect is different.

  Thereafter, in step S2110, it is determined whether or not the specific effect start command received this time corresponds to the operation effect of curtain movable object 52. As already described, as the operation effect, the first operation effect in which the curtain plate movable object 52 operates in accordance with the operation of the effect operation device 48 and the curtain plate movable object 52 does not operate even if the effect operation device 48 is operated. A second operation effect exists. If the information indicating that the specific effect start command received this time is the second operation effect is included, the operation effect corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the information indicating that the specific effect start command received this time is the first operation effect is included, the operation effect is read after executing the reading process of the movable object data in step S2111. The corresponding process is terminated.

  By executing the reading process of the movable object data, the movable object data is read from the sound light side ROM 113 to the sound light side RAM 114. Then, the drive control of the curtain plate movable object 52 according to the movable object data is executed in the movable object control process of step S507 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), so that the predetermined effect during the corresponding effect or the adjustment effect is obtained. The movable curtain plate 52 operates at the timing.

<Contents of operation effects>
Next, the contents of the operation effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the operation valid period is started in the game-playing effect in which the first operation effect is executed, the symbol display device 31 is prompted to operate the effect operation device 48 as shown in FIG. The validity period image is displayed. In this pachinko machine 10, since it is necessary to operate the rendering operation device 48 ten times in order to establish the corresponding execution condition, a display indicating that the rendering operation device 48 should be operated a plurality of times is displayed in the image for the effective period. The In addition, as the image for the effective period, the number of operations of the rendering operation device 48 necessary for establishing the corresponding execution condition is clearly indicated, and the value of the number of operations is subtracted every time the rendering operation device 48 is operated. It is good also as a structure.

  When the effect operating device 48 is operated so as to satisfy the corresponding execution condition, the corresponding effect image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 as shown in FIG. In this case, the curtain movable object 52 operates in the process in which the corresponding effect progresses as a moving image. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the executed effect is started in the symbol display device 31.

  On the other hand, when the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied, the non-corresponding effect image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 as shown in FIG. In this case, the operation valid period is started again at a predetermined timing thereafter.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 41 (e), the effective period image prompting the operation of the effect operating device 48 is displayed again on the symbol display device 31. The contents of the effective period image are the same as those in FIG. When the effect operation device 48 is operated so as to satisfy the corresponding execution condition, the corresponding effect image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 and the curtain is allowed as shown in FIG. The animal 52 operates, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (g), the executed effect is started on the symbol display device 31.

  On the other hand, when the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied, the non-corresponding effect image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 as shown in FIG. In this case, an adjustment effect image is displayed on the symbol display device 31 at a predetermined timing thereafter as shown in FIG. The contents of the adjustment effect image are the same as in the case of the corresponding effect shown in FIG. 41B and the case of the corresponding effect shown in FIG. In addition, the movable curtain 52 moves in the process in which the adjustment effect progresses as a moving image.

  Next, how the operation effect progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 42 (a1) to 42 (a3) show the operation effective period, FIGS. 42 (b1) to 42 (b3) show the execution period of the specific effect, and FIGS. 42 (c1) to 42 (c3) Indicates the execution period of non-specific effects.

  First, a case where the corresponding performance is executed when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied in the first operation valid period will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a1) to 42 (c1).

  At the timing of t11, the operation effective period is started as shown in FIG. 42 (a1), and when the effect operating device 48 is operated ten times during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends. At this timing, a specific effect (that is, a corresponding effect) is started as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, the specific effect is ended as shown in FIG. 42 (b1), whereby the non-specific effect (that is, the executed effect) is started as shown in FIG. 42 (c1). And the said non-specific effect is complete | finished at the timing of t14.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42A2 to 42C2, a case where the corresponding execution condition is established and the corresponding effect is executed in the second operation valid period will be described.

  At the timing of t11, the operation effective period is started as shown in FIG. 42 (a2), and when the rendering operation device 48 is not operated ten times during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends at t21. At the timing, a non-specific effect (that is, a non-corresponding effect) is started as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t22, the non-specific effect is ended as shown in FIG. 42 (c2), whereby the second operation effective period is started as shown in FIG. 42 (a2). As shown in FIG. 42 (b2), a specific effect (that is, a corresponding effect) is shown at (b2) in FIG. 42 (b2) by operating the effect operating device 48 ten times during the operation effective period. Is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing t24, the specific effect ends as shown in FIG. 42 (b2), so that the non-specific effect (that is, the executed effect) starts as shown in FIG. 42 (c2). And the said non-specific effect is complete | finished at the timing of t14.

  Next, a case where an adjustment effect is finally executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a3) to 42 (c3).

  At the timing of t11, the operation effective period is started as shown in FIG. 42 (a3), and when the effect operating device 48 is not operated ten times during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends at t31. At the timing, a non-specific effect (that is, a non-corresponding effect) is started as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t32, the non-specific effect is ended as shown in FIG. 42 (c3), whereby the second operation effective period is started as shown in FIG. 42 (a3). As shown in FIG. 42 (c3), the non-specific effect (that is, the non-corresponding effect) at the timing of t33, which is the timing at which the operation effective period ends, because the effect operating device 48 is not operated ten times even during the operation effective period. ) Is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t34, the non-specific effect is ended as shown in FIG. 42 (c3), whereby the specific effect (that is, the adjustment effect) is started as shown in FIG. 42 (b3). Then, the adjustment effect ends at the timing of t14.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Even if the non-correspondence effect is executed without performing the operation of the effect operation device 48 that establishes the corresponding execution condition during the first operation effective period, the operation effective period occurs again, and the second time When an operation of the effect operating device 48 that satisfies the corresponding execution condition is performed during the operation valid period, the corresponding effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to generate the opportunity to generate the corresponding effect by operating the effect operating device 48 during the operation effective period, and it is possible to increase the chance of the player confirming the corresponding effect.

  In particular, in order to execute the corresponding effect, it is necessary to operate the effect operation device 48 a plurality of times during the operation effective period. As a result, an event occurs in which the operation of the effect operation device 48 cannot be performed a plurality of times, such as when the operation effective period is noticed in the middle of the operation although the user wants to view the corresponding effect. there is a possibility. On the other hand, even if the non-correspondence effect is executed without satisfying the corresponding execution condition during the first operation effective period, the above-mentioned phenomenon occurs because the operation effective period occurs again. It is possible to secure an opportunity to generate a corresponding effect for the player who has been lost. Further, since the operation effective period is generated again, it is possible to provide the player again with a situation in which the corresponding effect is generated based on the operation of the effect operating device 48.

  If the operation of the effect operating device 48 that satisfies the corresponding execution condition is not performed in any operation valid period, the adjustment effect is finally executed, and the same effect content as the corresponding effect is provided. Is done. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player visually recognize the production contents of the corresponding production. Further, in the corresponding effect, the movement of the curtain plate movable object 52 occurs, but by adopting the configuration in which the operation effective period occurs again as described above and the configuration in which the adjustment effect is finally executed, It is possible to make the player surely see how the movable curtain plate 52 operates.

  The content of the corresponding effect executed when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied during the first operation effective period, the content of the effect of the corresponding effect executed when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied during the second operation effective period, and the adjustment effect The production contents are all the same. This makes it possible to share the content of the production regardless of the execution timing of the specific production, which is either the corresponding production or the adjustment production, so that the data capacity such as image data necessary for executing the specific production is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  The operation effective period and the adjustment effect triggered by the fact that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied in the operation effective period occur within the range of the effect for the game times in which the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied. Thereby, when giving the opportunity to perform a corresponding effect or an adjustment effect, it becomes possible to keep the influence within the range of the effect for one game round. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complicated control for executing the effects for each game.

  When the execution control of the effect for game times is performed with reference to only the base data table, the reference data table is switched from the base data table to the first branch side data table in the middle, and the reference data table is in the middle In any case of switching from the base data table to the second branch side data table, the execution period of the effect for game times is the same as the display duration determined by the main MPU 92. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the digestion time of the effect for the game times from fluctuating according to the operation mode of the effect operating device 48.

  The sound light side MPU 112 controls execution of effects in the various light emitting units 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, and the display side MPU 122 is based on a command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 112. The execution of the effect in the display device 31 is controlled. Thereby, when producing effects in the same period in each of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, it is difficult for each effect to be shifted. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

  In particular, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the sound light side MPU 112 transmits a command to the sound light side MPU 112 even though the sound light side MPU 112 exists upstream of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 122. It is possible to prevent the production of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the design display device 31 from being shifted. It becomes.

  The sound light side MPU 112 may perform the execution control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 according to the performance execution timing determined by the display side MPU 122. There is no need to specify. As a result, in a configuration that makes it difficult for deviations to occur in each effect, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the execution timing of the effect can be uniquely specified in each of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. It is done.

  The sound light side MPU 112 not only follows the execution timing of the effect determined in the display side MPU 122 but also the content of the effect to be executed may follow the content determined in the display side MPU 122. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration for determining the contents.

  In the configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the sound light side MPU 112 according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the display side MPU 122 does not transmit the command every time the control execution timing is reached, but performs predetermined control. Since the command is transmitted when the execution timing comes, the command transmission frequency in the display-side MPU 122 can be reduced. Thereby, the processing load of the display side MPU 122 can be reduced.

  The table MPU 122 reads out the table data corresponding to the entire effect executed in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, in the sound light side MPU 112, the table data corresponding to the whole is not read, and during the period according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 at each timing in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode. The control data for a part of the effect to be executed is read out. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for reading out the control data, compared to a configuration in which the control data corresponding to the whole is read out by each of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122.

  In particular, since the display side MPU 122 on the display control side of the symbol display device 31 reads table data corresponding to the whole of the effects executed in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, even if some communication abnormality occurs It becomes possible to continue updating the display on the symbol display device 31. Since the effect on the symbol display device 31 is easily noticed by the player, the updating of the display on the symbol display device 31 is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  The series of effects in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode may include a plurality of effects ranges with different effects, and the part of the control data is set corresponding to the plurality of effects ranges. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the control data unit from becoming too fine, and it is possible to moderately reduce the frequency of reading control data in the sound light side MPU 112.

  The display-side MPU 122 can perform execution control of a series of effects in game times and opening / closing execution modes by referring to the data table at each control execution timing, and also can transmit a command to the sound-side MPU 112. It is possible to specify. Therefore, information to be referred to in the display-side MPU 122 is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

  In the configuration in which the sound light side MPU 112 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the main side MPU 92 with respect to the display side MPU 122, and the execution contents of these effects are determined in the sound light side MPU 112 at the start of the game times and the opening / closing execution mode. Since the display-side MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the entire effects executed in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to achieve a distributed processing load.

  In the configuration in which the start timing of the game times and opening / closing execution mode effects is specified in the sound light side MPU 112, the sound light side MPU 112 waits for the display side MPU 122 to transmit a command, and then the effects corresponding to these series effects are performed. Since it is the structure made to start with the various light emission part groups 71-73 and the speaker part 45, it becomes possible to suppress that a shift | offset | difference arises in the start timing of an effect.

  While waiting for a command to be transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 at the start of a game play or a series of effects in the opening / closing execution mode, it waits until a command is transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 when an abnormality occurs. The sound light side MPU 112 starts the notification independently. As a result, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, notification is made in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45. Can be started.

  In the configuration in which the display-side MPU 122 reads out the data table corresponding to the whole of the effects executed in the game round, the sound-side MPU 112 has information on the game results (whether it is a jackpot result, The result type information) is stored and retained. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the execution control of the effect is performed in accordance with the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 in the sound light side MPU 112, the game result can be taken into consideration in the execution control of the effect.

  Since the display-side MPU 122 only has to transmit the command to the sound-light-side MPU 112 without taking into account the game result information, the configuration for transmitting the command can be optimized. In addition, the sound light side MPU 112 stores and holds information on the game result, and after determining whether or not the content of the effect executed in response to the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 corresponds to the game result. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the command to the display side MPU 122 is optimized as described above, the sound execution side MPU 112 may perform the execution control of the effect corresponding to the game result. It becomes possible.

  When a confirmed effect is performed on the symbol display device 31, the sound light side MPU 112 executes an effect corresponding to the content of the confirmed effect regardless of whether or not the content of the confirmed effect corresponds to the game result. Control is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match among the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73, the speaker unit 45, and the symbol display device 31, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to be shifted.

  The sound light side MPU 112 can read out the control data corresponding to the effects at different start timings during the game round from one command transmitted by the display side MPU 122. As a result, the command transmission frequency in the display side MPU 122 can be suppressed.

  The sound light side MPU 112 can derive a plurality of light emission data for controlling light emission of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 in a predetermined period by applying different start position numbers and durations to the pallet data. It is. Thereby, compared with a configuration in which light emission data different for each type of effect executed in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is stored in the sound light side ROM 113 at the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 10, the necessary memory in the sound light side ROM 113 is stored. The capacity can be reduced.

  Since the light emission data is derived by applying at least the start position number and the duration time to the palette data, the light emission data derived from one palette data can be diversified. In this case, a data selection table 151g that defines the correspondence between the pallet data to be used, the type of start position number applied to the pallet data, and the type of duration is stored in advance in the sound side ROM 113. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the correspondence between the pallet data and the parameter data applied thereto.

  A plurality of palette data are stored, and a plurality of start position numbers are also stored. Thereby, diversification of the light emission data can be realized while suppressing the storage capacity required in the sound light side ROM 113. In this case, start position data that defines the correspondence between the pallet data and the start position number is stored in advance. Thereby, simplification of the process for specifying the correspondence between the pallet data and the start position number is achieved.

  In the pallet data, the contents of the emission color of the switching destination when the emission colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched are determined, and the start position number applied to the pallet data is determined in the pallet data. This is a parameter indicating which of the plurality of switching destination emission colors to start the emission control of the LEDs 71a to 73a from which switching destination emission color. With this configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one pallet data by a simple method of different starting position numbers, and the light emission data can be stored while suppressing the storage capacity of the sound-side ROM 113. Diversification can be realized while facilitating design.

  In the pallet data, the content of the light emission color of the switching destination when the light emission colors of the LEDs 71a to 73a are sequentially switched is determined, and the duration applied to the palette data is the switching time defined in the pallet data. It is a parameter indicating the duration when the replacement emission color is continued. With this configuration, it is possible to derive a plurality of light emission data from one pallet data by a simple method of varying the duration time, and a variety of light emission data while suppressing the storage capacity of the sound side ROM 113. Can be realized while making the design easier.

  The light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 include a plurality of LEDs 71 a to 73 a, and start position numbers and continuations applied to some of the LEDs 71 a to 73 a while using the same palette data for the plurality of LEDs 71 a to 73 a. By making the times different, it becomes possible to derive different light emission data for the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a while using the same palette data. As a result, even when different effects are executed among the plurality of LEDs 71a to 73a, the same palette data can be used, so that it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

  There are cases where the same palette data is used for one light emitting unit group 71 to 73 and different palette data is used. Accordingly, it is possible to switch between a simple light emission effect mode and a complicated light emission effect mode only by changing the number of palette data applied to the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73.

  When different palette data is applied to one light emitting unit group 71 to 73, list data and group data indicating the type of palette data corresponding to each LED 71a to 73a included in the light emitting unit group 71 to 73 are used. It is the composition which is done. Thereby, simplification of the process for applying the pallet data corresponding to each LED 71a-73a is achieved.

  The light emission data area 162 is provided with a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c. The light emission data can be stored in each of the areas 162a to 162c. Thereby, in the situation where the light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is performed using one light emission data, it is necessary to perform the light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 using other light emission data. Even in this case, the other light emission data can be stored separately from the one light emission data. Thereby, it is possible to generate various light emission patterns according to the situation in one light emitting unit group 71 to 73. Further, when switching from one light emission pattern to the next light emission pattern, it is possible to leave the light emission data corresponding to the former light emission pattern, so that the processing load when returning to the former light emission pattern can be reduced. Figured.

  When the use of the previously used light emission data is stopped and the use of other light emission data is started, the use of the other light emission data is terminated and the light emission data used previously is used. When returning, at the return timing, the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 perform the same light emission mode as the case where the previously used light emission data is continuously used. Thereby, even if interruption use of other light emission data occurs, it becomes possible to perform the light emission mode according to elapsed time in the light emission part groups 71-73. In particular, in a configuration in which the light emission modes of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are performed in association with the display content of the symbol display device 31, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the display content on the symbol display device 31.

  In the light emission data, the priority in the case where the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are used is determined, and when a plurality of light emission data is stored at the same time, one light emission data is used and the priority is high. In this configuration, the emission data is used. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emission data is stored at the same time, light emission data having a high priority is used, so that the light emission operation occurring in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of light emission data is stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select light emission data to be used by comparing priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the light emission data to be used can be simplified.

  In the light emission data area 162 of the sound light side RAM 114, a base area 162a, an interrupt area 162b, and a notification area 162c are provided, and the priority of the light emission data is set in units of these areas. This eliminates the need to compare priorities for each light emission data when selecting light emission data to be used. Therefore, the process for selecting the light emission data to be used can be simplified.

  The interrupt area 162b is configured such that a new light emission data storage instruction can be issued in a situation where the light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b. The light emission data stored in the interrupt area 162b includes When the light emission side priority for storing in the interrupt area 162b is determined and the light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, a new light emission data storage instruction has already been generated. If the stored emission data has a higher emission side priority than the new emission data, the stored emission data is stored without executing the new emission data storage process. If the new emission data has higher priority on the emission side than the already stored emission data, the new emission data is used for interrupt. It is overwritten in the rear 162b.

  With this configuration, light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is performed using other light emission data in a situation where the light emission control of the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 is performed using one light emission data. When necessary, it is possible to switch to light emission control using the other light emission data. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform various operation | movement according to a condition in the one light emission part group 71-73. Further, in a configuration in which new light emission data can be overwritten even when light emission data is already stored in the interrupt area 162b, the light emission data having a high light emission side priority is stored in the interrupt area 162b. Therefore, the light emitting operation in the light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 can be made appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the light emission data to be stored in the interrupt area 162b, it is only necessary to compare the light emission side priorities, so that the processing for storing the light emission data in the interrupt area 162b can be simplified. .

  The sound output data area 163 includes a first sound output area 171 to a sixteenth sound output area 186, and each of the areas 171 to 186 can store sound output data. Thereby, in the situation where sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed using one sound output data, it becomes necessary to perform sound output control of the speaker unit 45 using other sound output data. Even if it exists, the other sound output data can be stored separately from the one sound output data. As a result, the speaker unit 45 can output various sounds according to the situation. Further, when switching from one sound output pattern to the next sound output pattern, it is possible to leave sound output data corresponding to the former sound output pattern, so that when returning to the former sound output pattern, The processing load can be reduced.

  If you stop using the previously used sound output data and start using other sound output data, the use of the other sound output data ends and the previously used sound output data is When returning to the use state, at the return timing, the same sound output as that in the case where the previously used sound output data is continuously used is performed by the speaker unit 45. Thereby, even if interruption use of other sound output data occurs, it becomes possible to cause the speaker unit 45 to perform a sound output mode corresponding to the elapsed time. In particular, in a configuration in which the sound output mode of the speaker unit 45 is performed in association with the display content of the symbol display device 31, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the display content on the symbol display device 31.

  In the sound output data, the sound output side priority in the case where the speaker unit 45 is to be used is defined, and when a plurality of sound output data is stored at the same time, In this configuration, sound output data having a high output side priority is used. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of sound output data is simultaneously stored, sound output data having a high sound output side priority is used, so that the sound output operation generated in the speaker unit 45 can be made appropriate. It becomes. Further, even when a plurality of sound output data is stored simultaneously, it is possible to easily select sound output data to be used by comparing the sound output side priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the sound output data to be used can be simplified.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as a game-playing effect, the symbol display on the symbol display device 31 is in a predetermined manner (specifically, the symbol variation display on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at high speed). The unit variation display in which the variation display is ended and the predetermined stop symbol is stopped and displayed after the start is started can be generated a plurality of times. Accordingly, the processing contents of the main-side command handling process and the display-side command handling process in the sound light side MPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, each of these corresponding processes will be described. In the following description, an effect in which unit variation display is performed a plurality of times in one game time is referred to as a pseudo game time effect, and each unit variation display time in the pseudo game time effect is referred to as a pseudo game time.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing main-side command handling processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 92 or not. If these commands have been received, a game result and display duration storage process is executed in step S2202. The game result information is specified from the type command as in the first embodiment, and the display duration information is specified from the change command.

  In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the current display continuation time corresponds to the execution of the pseudo game turn effect. That is, whether or not to execute the pseudo game round effect is uniquely determined by the display duration time. In this case, in the main MPU 92, it is easier to select the display continuation time corresponding to the pseudo game times effect in the game times that are the jackpot result and the game times that are the reach reach display than the other game times. It has a configuration. Further, not only the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo game times effect, but also the number of times of the pseudo game times executed in the pseudo game times effect is uniquely determined by the display duration time. In this case, the number of simulated game times is either 2, 3, or 4 times, and the game times that are jackpot results and the game times that show a disappointing reach display with high expectation of the jackpot results are the jackpot The number of simulated game times is larger than the number of game times in which the expectation of the result is low and the reach is displayed.

  In the subsequent step S2204, the number of simulated game times is stored in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114. Thereafter, in step S2205, a notice lottery process is executed. The content of the process is the same as that in step S603 in the first embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S2206, a first stop symbol determination process is executed. The stop symbol determination process corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5 and a combination of reach symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information, and information on stop results corresponding to pseudo game times other than the last game (for example, information on stop results where a predetermined symbol combination such as “3, 4, 1” is established on any active line) It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In step S2207, the first effect pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the effect pattern of the first pseudo game time corresponding to the display duration of the current game time is selected. Incidentally, the display duration of the first pseudo game times is shorter than the display duration of the current game times.

  In subsequent step S2208, the information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S2207 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S2206 are written in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114. Thereafter, in step S2209, similarly to step S607 in the first embodiment, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display-side MPU 122, and in step S2210, in step S608 in the first embodiment. Similarly, a process for updating the number of games is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, processing similar to that in steps S605 to S608 in the first embodiment is executed as processing for non-winning in step S2211. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process in step S2210 is executed, or the process in step S2211 is executed, the other steps in step S2212 are the steps in the first embodiment. The same processing as S609 to step S629 is executed.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing display side command handling processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a change end command is received from the display side MPU 122 or not. The change end command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 when the display control using the pattern data table read out when the display side MPU 122 receives the stop result command and the pattern command is completed. Command. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not a pseudo game play effect is being executed in the current game play. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the number of times of the pseudo game stored in the sound side RAM 114 in step S2204 of the main side command handling process is larger than the number of times of execution of the pseudo game times completed in the current game time. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S2301 to S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, the current game result and display duration time stored in the retained data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114 are read. Thereafter, in step S2305, the type of effect pattern of the pseudo game times of the current game time is read out.

  In the subsequent step S2306, stop symbol determination processing corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, when the current pseudo game time is not the final time, the same stop result information as the first stop symbol determination process is selected, and the current pseudo game time is the final time In the same manner as in step S604 in the first embodiment, information on the stop result corresponding to the game result of the current game round is selected.

  In the subsequent step S2307, an effect pattern determination process corresponding to the number of executions is executed. In the effect pattern determination process, if the current pseudo game time is not the final game time, an effect pattern corresponding to the display duration of the current game time and the number of execution times of the current pseudo game time is selected. When the current pseudo game number is the last time, an effect pattern in which a reach display of a type corresponding to the current display duration time is executed is selected. In the effect pattern determination process, the effect pattern is selected by referring to the information read in step S2305 so that a common effect is executed in each pseudo game round. Specifically, when the notice display is performed in the first pseudo game round, the notice display is also performed in the pseudo game round executed later in the current game round. In this case, a notice display with a higher expectation of the jackpot result may be performed in the rear pseudo game times.

  In subsequent step S2308, the information on the type of effect pattern selected in step S2307 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S2306 are written in the holding data area 161 of the sound side RAM 114. Thereafter, in step S2309, similarly to step S607 in the first embodiment, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 122, and the number of executions provided in the sound side RAM 114 in step S2310. Add 1 to the counter value.

  If a negative determination is made in any of step S2301, step S2302, and step S2303, or if the process of step S2310 is executed, the display side command in the first embodiment is executed as another process in step S2311. Steps S1201 to S1216 of the corresponding process (FIG. 22) are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the pseudo game times effect is performed, the data table for the whole of each pseudo game time is read by the display side MPU 122 and the sound light side MPU 112 displays the display side. In this configuration, control data is set according to a command transmitted from the MPU 122 during pseudo game play, and the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 are performed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to set control data even when a pseudo game turn effect is performed.

  Further, at the start of each pseudo game round, the sound pattern side MPU 112 determines the production pattern based on the game result of the corresponding game round and the contents of the pseudo game round digested so far. Thus, in the configuration in which the effect pattern of the pseudo game times is determined based on the game results of the game times and the contents of the pseudo game times that have been digested so far, the processing load for making the determination is changed to the sound side MPU 112. It becomes possible to distribute to. Therefore, the processing load can be distributed.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents of the task process (FIG. 37) for operation effects in the first embodiment are different. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing task processing for operation effects in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the current data table. If there is no additional data, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table in step S2402, and one frame corresponding to the current update timing is read in accordance with the read task data in step S2403. In order to display the image of the minute, the calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed.

  On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table in step S2404, and the subsequent step S2405 is performed. Then, in accordance with the read task data and additional data, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 125 is performed. In addition, as a case where the process of step S2404 and step S2405 is performed, the case where the character image of an alert | report is added is mentioned.

  When the process of step S2403 is executed or when the process of step S2405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2406. In step S2406, by checking the current data table, it is determined whether or not the current pointer information corresponds to the end timing of the operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2406, the task processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the process proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2407, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation number counter of the display side RAM 124 is equal to or more than the specific number of times set as a value of 2 or more, specifically 10 or more. If it is determined in step S2407 that the value of the operation number counter is 10 or more, it is determined that the corresponding execution condition is satisfied, and in step S2408, the current corresponding execution condition is satisfied during the first operation effective period. It is determined whether or not the error occurred. If it has occurred during the first operation valid period, the first-stage data table change process is executed in step S2409, and then this task process is terminated. In the first-stage data table change process, the data table to be referred to is changed from the base data table to the first branch side data table. The contents of the first branch side data table are the same as those in the first embodiment. If the current execution condition is satisfied during the second operation valid period, the second-stage data table change process is executed in step S2410, and then this task process ends. In the data table change process at the second stage, the data table to be referred to is changed from the base data table to the second branch side data table. The contents of the second branch side data table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2407 that the value of the operation number counter of the display side RAM 124 is less than 10, the process proceeds to step S2411, and whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more and less than 10. Determine whether. That is, it is determined whether or not the effect operation device 48 is operated in the current operation valid period. If a negative determination is made in step S2411, the task processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2411, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the current operation valid period is the first time. If it is the first operation valid period, the task process is terminated after executing the first stage opportunity grant data table change process in step S2413. If it is the second operation valid period, the task process is terminated after executing the second stage opportunity grant data table changing process in step S2414.

  In the present embodiment, in the base data table, the execution opportunity of the operation effective period is set only once, and further, the execution opportunity of the adjustment effect is not set. In other words, the base data table is set so that the operation effective period is set only once and the non-correspondence effect is executed on the assumption that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied in the operation effective period. The non-corresponding effect is set to continue until the start timing of the display effect for ending the effect for game times. In the present embodiment, as the pattern data table group when the operation effect occurs, in addition to the base data table, the first branch side base table, and the second branch side base table, the first opportunity giving base table and the first data table A base table for giving two opportunities is set.

  The first opportunity granting base table is set such that the second operation effective period is set, and further, the non-correspondence effect is executed on the assumption that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied in the operation effective period. In addition, the non-corresponding effect is set to continue until the start timing of the display effect for ending the effect for game times. The second opportunity granting base table is set so that the adjustment effect is set and the adjustment effect continues until the start timing of the display effect that ends the game-turn effect.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, even if the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied during the operation effective period, unless the effect operating device 48 is operated during the operation effective period, the opportunity for executing the corresponding effect or the adjustment effect is performed. Can be given as a remedy for a player who wants to see the corresponding performance, meaningless to the player who does not want to see the corresponding performance. It is possible to prevent the execution opportunity from being given.

  It should be noted that even if the production operation device 48 is not operated in the first operation effective period, the next operation effective period is generated, and the corresponding execution condition for the operation of the production operation device 48 in each operation effective period is as follows. If it is not established, an adjustment effect may be executed as relief. Thereby, it becomes possible to give the execution opportunity of a corresponding effect only to the player who wants to see the corresponding effect.

  Further, even if the production operation device 48 is not operated in the first operation effective period, the next operation effective period is generated, and the total number of operations of the production operation device 48 in each operation effective period is 1 or more. Or it is good also as a structure by which adjustment production | presentation is performed when it reaches the relief frequency set as two or more and less than a specific frequency.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) At the start of a series of effects such as game times and opening / closing execution modes, the sound light side MPU 112 does not receive a command corresponding to the start of the series of effects from the display side MPU 122, and various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 are received. The light emission control and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 may be started. In particular, when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 in a situation where the holding information is not stored in the holding area RE and the game times are started, the start timing of the game times is an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the display-side MPU 122 cannot transmit a command corresponding to the start of the game times in advance. In this case, as described above, at the start of the series production, by performing the light emission control of the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 without receiving a command from the display side MPU 122, These effects are less likely to be delayed with respect to the start timing of the game times.

  (2) The display-side MPU 122 only outputs a command indicating that it is the timing corresponding to the switching of the production contents to the sound light-side MPU 112, and the timing corresponding to the switching corresponds to any production content. It is good also as a structure specified in the sound-light side MPU112. For example, the sound light side MPU 112 measures the number of transmission commands of the display side MPU 122 after the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are started, and the command transmitted by the display side MPU 122 is assigned to any effect content from the measurement result. A configuration for identifying whether the switching is supported can be considered. Specifically, in the situation where the data table shown in FIG. 18 is read by the display-side MPU 122, the sound-side MPU 112 specifies that the first command reception corresponds to the start of fluctuation, and the second time. It is specified that the command reception corresponds to the start of the notice effect. According to such a configuration, the content of the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 can be simplified, and for example, a period necessary for command transmission can be shortened.

  (3) Even if the data whose relatively long side is set in the RAM is not the display side MPU 122 but the sound light side MPU 112 as data for executing a series of effects in the game times and opening / closing execution modes Good. In this case, the entire flow of the series effect is controlled according to the data table set in the sound light side MPU 112, and when the execution timing of each effect range included in the series effect is reached, the sound light side MPU 112 displays the display side MPU 122. And the display-side MPU 122 receives the command, reads out data for controlling the effect range corresponding to the command, and performs execution control of the effect in the effect range.

  (4) The effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to control means other than the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122, for example, the main side MPU 92. The effect operation device 48 may be configured to output an operation signal to the display side MPU 122 instead of the sound light side MPU 112. In this case, when the sound effect side MPU 112 is configured to determine the contents of the operation effect, it is necessary to execute the operation effect after performing bidirectional communication between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. Occurs.

  (5) The timing at which the display side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound light side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating the transition of the production content, but every time a predetermined number of frames are consumed, that is, the display side MPU 122. The command may be transmitted from the display-side MPU 122 to the sound-light-side MPU 112 each time the number of times that the control display timing of the symbol display device 31 is reached is a predetermined number. In this case, the command includes data corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table read out by the display side MPU 122, for example, the type of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 31, the content of the background image, other than the symbol. A frame content such as a character type and a motion content of the character may be set. The sound light side MPU 112 may be configured to specify light emission data and sound output data to be set from the frame contents included in the command. According to this configuration, the display-side MPU 122 only needs to transmit a command periodically, and it is only necessary to set the frame content in the command. And the processing can be simplified.

  The command transmission is not performed every frame, but the command is transmitted once in a specific number of frames such as 10 frames or 100 frames. The frequency can be suppressed.

  Further, in this configuration, since a command for setting the emission data and sound output data in advance is not transmitted to the sound side MPU 112, at the timing when the command is received, the emission data and sound output data are not transmitted. Setting will be started.

  (6) The timing at which the display side MPU 122 transmits a command to the sound light side MPU 112 is not limited to the timing for indicating the transition of the content of the production, and the production period of the data table read by the display side MPU 122 A command is transmitted from the display side MPU 122 to the sound light side MPU 112 at each timing corresponding to the start of these divided ranges, and control data corresponding to the divided range is set in the sound light side MPU 112. It is good also as a structure to be. For example, when the production period of the above data table is divided into the first half and the second half, the command is transmitted at a timing corresponding to the start of the first half of the divided range, and at the timing corresponding to the start of the second half of the divided range. Will be sent. According to this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the command transmission timing in the display-side MPU 122.

  (7) The display-side MPU 122 does not read the entire data table corresponding to a series of effects in the game times and opening / closing execution modes at a time, but from the light emission data and sound output data set at one time in the sound light-side MPU 112. Although a data table corresponding to a long period is read out, it may be configured to correspond to a period shorter than the whole corresponding to a series of effects. For example, when a command is transmitted from the light-side MPU 112 to the display-side MPU 122 in response to receiving a command from the main-side MPU 92, the display-side MPU 122 may read the data table for each command.

  In this case, during the game round, when the main MPU 92 transmits the change command and the type command, the display side MPU 122 reads the data table from the start of the game round to the timing immediately before the final stop display of the symbol. When the main side MPU 92 transmits a final stop command, the display side MPU 122 may be configured to read a data table for the period of the last stop display of the game times.

  In addition, during the opening / closing execution mode, when the main MPU 92 transmits an opening command, the display MPU 122 has a data table from the start of the opening / closing execution mode until the first opening of the special prize winning device 22 is started. When the main MPU 92 transmits an open command, the display MPU 122 reads the data table corresponding to the open time, and when the main MPU 92 transmits a close command, the display MPU 122 When the data table corresponding to the interval is read and the main MPU 92 transmits an ending command, the display MPU 122 reads the data table from the start of the ending effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Even in this configuration, the sound light side MPU 112 receives light emission data and sound output data corresponding to a shorter period than the data table read by the display side MPU 122 according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122 each time. With the configuration to be set, it is possible to suppress the necessary storage capacity. In this configuration, for a part of the production range, the corresponding period of the light emission data and sound output data read by the sound light side MPU 112 may be the same as the corresponding period of the data table read by the display side MPU 122. Good.

  (8) The command transmitted from the main MPU 92 may be received not only by the sound light MPU 112 but also by the display MPU 122. In this case, when a command is transmitted from the main MPU 92, the sound light MPU 112 transmits a command indicating that the command from the main MPU 92 has been normally received to the display MPU 122, and the display MPU 122 transmits the command. When the command is received from the sound light side MPU 112, a data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92 may be read. In this case, the sound light side MPU 112 may read out a data table corresponding to the command received from the main side MPU 92. However, as in the above embodiments, the data table corresponding to the command is set. Instead, the required storage capacity can be reduced by setting the light emission data and the sound output data corresponding to the partial production range according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122. Further, in the configuration, when a notification target event such as an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a notification command is transmitted to both the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. When the display side MPU 122 receives a notification command, the notification on the various light emitting units 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 and the notification on the symbol display device 31 are started without waiting for command transmission from the other party. Also good.

  (9) The retained data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114 may be configured to measure the number of times a predetermined notice display or a predetermined reach display has been performed. In this case, for example, when a predetermined notice display is not executed even though a predetermined number of game times have been consumed, the selection probability of the predetermined notice display may be increased. May be forcibly selected.

  (10) When the game result information of the game times is stored and held in the holding data area 161 of the sound light side RAM 114, and the sound light side MPU 112 receives a command corresponding to the execution timing of the finalized effect from the display side MPU 122 Although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the confirmed effect by referring to the game result information stored and retained in the retained data area 161, the display side MPU 122 is not limited to this. By performing command transmission based on game result information, the sound light side MPU 112 may be configured to perform execution control of the confirmed effect when a command corresponding to the execution of the confirmed effect is received from the display side MPU 122.

  (11) Even if the sound light side MPU 112 receives the confirmation execution command from the display side MPU 122, the sound effect side MPU 112 refers to the information of the game result of the game times stored and retained in the retained data area 161, thereby confirming the effect. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute. In this case, even if some kind of abnormality occurs and the final effect is executed on the symbol display device 31 even though it is not the jackpot result, the final effects on the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45 are executed. It becomes possible to stop. At this time, in the various light emitting unit groups 71 to 73 and the speaker unit 45, it may be notified that the finalized effect in the symbol display device 31 is not a normal operation.

  (12) The configuration in which the sound light side MPU 112 reads a plurality of control data in response to one command from the display side MPU 122 is in addition to or instead of the sound output data read processing, You may apply. Further, the number of control data read for one command is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

  (13) The display side MPU 122 reads out control data corresponding to a longer period than the control data set at once in the sound light side MPU 112, and the sound light side MPU 112 transmits a command from the display side MPU 122. Accordingly, when the control data corresponding to a part of the production range is set, when attention is paid to the effect that the storage capacity for setting the control data is reduced, the sound light side MPU 112 is used. And the display-side MPU 122 do not have to be bidirectional communication. For example, when the main MPU 92 is used as a reference, the display MPU 122 is configured to exist upstream in the communication direction with respect to the sound light MPU 112, and a series of commands corresponding to commands transmitted from the main MPU 92 in the display MPU 122. When the data table for the entire effect is read and the sound side MPU 112 is configured to set control data corresponding to a partial effect range according to the command transmitted from the display side MPU 122, the sound The communication method between the optical side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 may not be bidirectional communication.

  (14) Between the effect that is executed and controlled in the sound light side MPU 112 and the effect that is executed and controlled in the display side MPU 122 because the communication method between the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 is bidirectional communication. If attention is paid to the effect that it is difficult to cause a shift, the data table corresponding to the entire series of effects may be read out in both the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122. In this case, for example, one of the sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 determines whether or not execution control of a predetermined production range should be started in accordance with a command transmitted from the other, and is a start timing. It is good also as a structure which updates the pointer information about the data table for the whole already read when it specifies as the information corresponding to the start timing of the predetermined production | presentation range.

  (15) The configuration for deriving the control information group by applying the setting information to the original information may be applied to the sound output data in addition to or instead of the light emission data. You may apply with respect to drive data. For example, when applied to drive data for moving object drive control, when the operation contents of the movable object are sequentially switched, the original data in which the operation contents of the switching destination are defined and a plurality of switching data defined in the original data Starting reference data indicating which of the switching destination operation contents the operation of the movable object starts from the switching destination operation contents, and continuation when continuing the switching destination operation contents defined in the original data At least continuation reference data indicating time may be prepared, and a combination thereof may be used to derive a larger number of drive data than the number of original data, start reference data, and continuation reference data.

  (16) The light emission data group 151 may not include the list data group 151e and the group data group 151f. In this case, the process for creating the light emission data can be simplified.

  (17) The sound output side priority may be set even between the sound output data for notification. In this case, only the sound output data for notification having the highest priority may be output, and the sound output data for notification is sequentially output in the order according to the priority on the sound output side. It is good also as composition used as object. In this configuration, for example, among various events to be notified, notification regarding an act of illegally receiving a privilege is given, notification that the lower plate 47a is full, or the gaming machine main body 12 is released. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize the state notification of the pachinko machine 10 such as notification that it is being performed, and to promptly cope with fraudulent acts.

  (18) In place of the notification area 162c of the light emission data area 162, an abnormality notification area for performing abnormality notification when an event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 occurs, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 In addition, a state notification area for performing state notification when an event other than the event corresponding to the illegal act occurs may be provided separately. In this case, the abnormality notification can be executed with the highest priority by making the light emission side priority of the abnormality notification area higher than the light emission side priority of the state notification area. In addition, by making the light emission side priority of the state notification area higher than the light emission side priority of the base area 162a and the interrupt area 162b, it becomes possible to execute the state notification in preference to the production. .

  (19) The display side MPU 122 is limited to a configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 according to the pattern data table at each timing during a period in which an effect corresponding to the pattern data table is being executed. Instead, after the pattern data table is read out, the command may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 112 before starting the production according to the pattern data table. For example, a command for reading control data when starting an effect corresponding to the pattern data table is transmitted in advance before execution control of the effect is started in the display-side MPU 122, and thereafter The command may be transmitted again at a predetermined timing during the period in which the effect corresponding to the pattern data table is being executed.

  (20) The sound light side MPU 112 and the display side MPU 122 may be provided on the same substrate. In this case, the VDP 125, the character ROM 126, and the video RAM 127 may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on separate substrates.

  (21) A configuration in which an operation effective period can occur in an effect for game times after the predetermined game time when the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied during the operation effective period in the effect for a predetermined game time. Also good. For example, the operation valid period may be generated regardless of whether or not the execution of the operation effect is determined based on the result of the internal lottery at the game time performed after the predetermined game time. Further, for example, the operation valid period may be generated on condition that the game time to be performed next to a predetermined game time is a game time that is a jackpot result or a game time that is a miss reach display. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the operation valid period occurs.

  (22) If the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied during the operation effective period, the number of operation effective periods that occur thereafter is not limited to one, and is two times, three times, four times or more. Also good. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the operation valid period, and it is possible to increase the chance that the corresponding effect is generated based on the operation of the effect operation device 48.

  (23) The content of the corresponding effect when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the first operation effective period is different from the content of the corresponding effect when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the second operation effective period. It is good also as composition which has. For example, when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the first operation valid period, a flashy effect may be executed compared to when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the second operation effective period. It is good also as a structure by which plain production is performed. Specifically, when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the first operation effective period, the motion of the curtain plate movable object 52 occurs in addition to the corresponding effect in the symbol display device 31, whereas the second time When the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the operation effective period, a configuration in which the corresponding display in the symbol display device 31 is generated but the operation of the curtain plate movable object 52 is not generated can be considered.

  (24) The content of the corresponding effect may be different from the content of the adjustment effect. For example, the corresponding effect may be configured to perform a flashy effect than the adjustment effect, or may be configured to perform a plain effect. Specifically, in the corresponding effect, the motion of the curtain plate movable object 52 occurs in addition to the display effect in the symbol display device 31, whereas in the adjustment effect, the display effect in the symbol display device 31 is generated although the display effect is generated. A configuration in which the movement of the animal 52 does not occur is conceivable, and a configuration of the reverse pattern is also conceivable.

  (25) A configuration may be adopted in which a corresponding effect is generated if the effect operating device 48 is operated once in the operation effective period. Even in this case, if the production operation device 48 is not operated during the operation effective period, the player confirms the production content of the corresponding production by generating the operation effective period again or generating the adjustment production. It becomes possible to give many opportunities to do. In this configuration, when the effect operating device 48 is operated during the operation effective period, “1” is set to the operation generation flag provided in the sound side RAM 114 or the display side RAM 124, and the operation is performed. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure by which a corresponding effect is performed by confirming that the generation | occurrence | production flag is set to "1" in the sound light side MPU112 or the display side MPU122.

  (26) In the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed when the effect operation device 48 is operated a specific number of times (specifically, 10 times), the effect operation device 48 is operated in the operation effective period of a predetermined execution time. However, if the number of operations does not reach the specified number, the sum of the number of operations in the operation effective period and the number of operations in the previous operation effective period reaches the specified number in the next operation effective period. It is good also as a structure by which corresponding production is performed. In this case, a corresponding effect is likely to occur, and it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to confirm the corresponding effect.

  (27) When the production operation device 48 is operated once at a predetermined timing during the operation valid period, a corresponding production occurs, but even if the production operation device 48 is operated, the operation timing is not the predetermined timing. In some cases, a corresponding effect may not be generated. In this case, even if the player who wants to see the corresponding effect cannot operate the effect operating device 48 at a predetermined timing, an opportunity for viewing the corresponding effect is given to the player when an operation effective period or an adjustment effect occurs thereafter. It becomes possible.

  (28) In the game times in which the operation effects are executed, a predetermined series of effects may be repeated except for the operation effective period, the corresponding effect execution period, the non-corresponding effect execution period, and the adjustment effect execution period. . For example, it is good also as a structure by which the production | presentation by which a predetermined character is variably displayed in a predetermined mode is repeated. In this case, if the non-correspondence effect is executed without satisfying the corresponding execution condition in the first operation effective period, and the new operation effective period and the adjustment effect are not generated thereafter, the effect content becomes monotonous. Although there is a possibility, the occurrence of a new operation effective period or adjustment effect may suppress monotonization of the effect content.

  (29) Although the operation effect is generated as an effect for game times, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation effect may be generated as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Even in this case, if the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied in the operation effective period in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, a new operation effective period or adjustment effect is generated within the range of the opening / closing execution mode. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the influence that a new operation effective period or adjustment effect occurs within the range of one opening / closing execution mode.

  (30) In an effect for one game turn and an effect for one opening / closing execution mode, there are a plurality of timings at which the operation effective period is executed, and the corresponding execution condition is established in the operation effective period and the corresponding effect is generated. When executed, the content of the effect may proceed in accordance with a predetermined rule toward the corresponding effect on the rear side. For example, when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied and the corresponding effect is executed in the first operation effective period, only the first character appears, whereas the corresponding execution condition is satisfied in the second operation effective period. When the corresponding effect is executed, the number of appearance characters may be gradually increased such that the first character and the second character appear, and the display color of the displayed predetermined character is It is good also as a structure which changes gradually.

  Also, in this configuration, for example, even if the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied in the second operation effective period, the corresponding effect is stepped up by adopting a configuration in which the third operation effective period occurs. It is possible to increase opportunities for the player to confirm.

  (31) The number of operations of the rendering operation device 48 necessary for establishing the corresponding execution condition may be configured such that the operation effective period on the rear side decreases or increases. When the rear operation effective period is configured to reduce the number of operations necessary to establish the corresponding execution condition, the condition for generating the corresponding effect becomes looser as the rear operation effective period becomes, It becomes easy to generate a corresponding production.

  (32) In place of the configuration in which the corresponding effect is generated when the effect operation device 48 is operated in the operation effective period, a touch sensor that detects that the player has touched the predetermined operation area is provided, and in the operation effective period A configuration may be adopted in which a corresponding effect is generated when the player touches a predetermined operation area, or when the player touches the predetermined operation area a specific number of times. Also, a detection sensor for detecting the movement of the player's hand is provided, and a corresponding effect occurs when the movement of the player's hand is detected during the operation valid period or when the movement of the player's hand is detected a specific number of times. It is good also as a structure.

  (33) While the special electric prize winning device 22 is closed, the special electric prize winning device 22 is completely closed. However, a part of the special electric prize winning device 22 may not be closed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can win the special electric prize device 22 even if it is closed through the partial area, and the partial ball is closed because the partial area is narrower than the game ball. However, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball cannot be awarded to the special electric prize winning device 22.

  (34) Instead of a configuration in which a winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 24 is impossible during the closing of the power utility item 24a, a game to the lower operation port 24 is performed even when the power service item 24a is closed. It may be configured such that a winning of a ball can occur. However, the easiness of winning the prize needs to be lower than that during the opening of the general electric utility 24a.

  (35) The hold information acquired when the winning to the upper working port 23 is generated and the holding information acquired when the winning to the lower working port 24 is separately stored and stored. A configuration in which the 24-side hold information is preferentially digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the hold information on the upper working port 23 side is preferentially digested may be applied. You may apply the structure digested in an acquisition order irrespective of whether it is the opening | mouth 23 or the lower action | operation opening 24. FIG.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 23 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 24 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launching handle 41.

  In the above configuration, the special display unit 33 displays a first display area for displaying the result of determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24. You may provide the 2nd display area which displays the result of the success / failure determination of the acquired hold information. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (36) The case where the hold information acquired by the winning of the upper working port 23 is a target of the determination of the success and the hold information acquired when the winning of the lower operating port 24 is generated is the success or failure It is good also as a structure from which the profit which a player obtains differs with the case where it becomes the object of determination. For example, when the hold information on the upper working port 23 side is the target of the determination of the success / failure, the game results are distributed as in the above embodiment, but the hold information on the lower operation port 24 side is the target of the determination of the success / failure In the case of winning the jackpot, it may be configured to be distributed to either the most advantageous jackpot result, the explicit high probability big hit result, or the low probability big hit result.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (37) When the main control device 90 is used as a reference, the display control device 120 is replaced with the sound emission control device 103 instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 103 is present upstream of the display control device 120 in the communication direction. It is good also as a structure which exists in the upstream of a communication direction rather than. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 103 and the display control device 120 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main controller 90, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 90. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 90 to the sound emission control device 103 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 103 to the display control device 120 are also arbitrary.

  (38) The device for executing the game effect or operation effect is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and the game effect is executed by operating a decorative member that is movably provided. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, and an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. It is good also as a structure.

  (39) In each of the above embodiments, the special figure display unit 33 displays a stop result corresponding to each game result, but instead, the special figure display unit 33 may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed in the special figure display part 33, and a special result display part 33 displays a stop result at random in the special figure display part 33 as a result. From the display of 33, it is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result it is.

  (40) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The first control means and the second control means are capable of bidirectional communication,
The first control means is a first side execution means (in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect during a predetermined period based on the transmission information transmitted by the second control means. A function of executing light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object control processing),
The second control means causes the second effect means to execute an effect in a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means. A gaming machine comprising a side execution means (function for executing task processing in the display side MPU 122).

  According to the characteristic A1, the first control unit controls the execution of the effect in the first effect unit based on the transmission information transmitted from the second control unit, and the second control unit determines the transmission information transmitted from the first control unit. Based on this, the execution of the effect in the second effect means is controlled. Thereby, when producing an effect in the same period in each of the first effect means and the second effect means, it is difficult for the effects of both to occur. As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information capable of specifying a timing at which the first effect means executes the effect for the predetermined period.

  According to the feature A2, the first control means may perform the execution control of the effect of the first effect means according to the execution timing of the effect determined by the second control means. There is no need to specify. As a result, in a configuration that makes it difficult for the effects of both to occur, the processing load is reduced compared to the case where the execution timing of the effects can be uniquely specified by each of the first control means and the second control means. Is planned.

Feature A3. The first effect means can execute any one of the contents of the plurality of kinds of effects as the effect of the predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the second control means is capable of transmitting transmission information in such a manner that the type of effect content to be executed as the effect of the predetermined period can be specified.

  According to the feature A3, the first control means not only follows the performance execution timing determined by the second control means, but also the content of the performance to be executed may follow the content determined by the second control means. The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the content of the effect is uniquely determined in one control means.

Feature A4. The second-side execution means performs the execution control of the effect in the second effect means every time the control execution timing comes.
The second control unit does not transmit the transmission information to the first control unit every time the control execution timing is reached, but transmits the transmission information to the first control unit at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. The gaming machine according to Feature A2 or A3, which transmits information.

  According to feature A4, in the configuration in which the execution timing of the effect is specified by the first control means according to the transmission information transmitted from the second control means, the second control means transmits the transmission information every time the control execution timing is reached. Since the transmission information is transmitted when the predetermined control execution timing is reached, the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control means can be reduced. Thereby, the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

Feature A5. The first control unit includes a lottery execution unit (a function of executing steps S603 to S605 in the sound light side MPU 112) for executing a lottery process.
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the result of the lottery process,
In any one of the features A1 to A4, the second rendering means is configured such that the rendering in a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A5, in spite of the fact that the lottery process is executed in the first control means, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the effect is executed. Since it is the structure to perform, it becomes possible to suppress that a shift | offset | difference arises in each effect in a 1st effect means and a 2nd effect means.

Feature A6. Providing progress control means (main MPU92) for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the lottery execution unit executes the lottery process based on the content of transmission information transmitted by the progress control unit.

  According to the feature A6, when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means has the second control means even though the first control means exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the second control means. Since it is the structure that the production is executed after waiting for transmission information to be transmitted, it is possible to prevent the production of the first production means and the second production means from being shifted. It becomes.

Feature A7. A transmission control unit (main MPU 92) that transmits transmission information to the first control unit and does not transmit the transmission information to the second control unit;
In the first effect means, the effect in the predetermined period is performed with contents corresponding to the transmission information transmitted by the first control means,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the second effect means is configured such that the effect during the predetermined period is performed with content corresponding to transmission information transmitted by the first control means. Machine.

  According to the feature A7, when the progress control means is used as a reference, the first control means has the second control means even though the first control means exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the second control means. Since it is the structure that the production is executed after waiting for transmission information to be transmitted, it is possible to prevent the production of the first production means and the second production means from being shifted. It becomes.

Feature A8. When the second start execution means is a predetermined start trigger, the second effect means is in a specific duration (during game play, opening / closing execution mode) that is a period overlapping with at least a part of the predetermined period. To execute a specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode),
The second control means includes a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data) used for causing the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start trigger is reached. A second side setting means for setting a table) (function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122),
The first side executing means is for causing the first effect means to execute an effect corresponding to the specific range effect in the specific duration.
The first control means is a first side setting means (sound light) for setting a control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for causing the first effect means to execute an effect during the specific duration period. A function of executing a light emission data read process and a sound output data read process in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but the second control means sets the control information group for each of the specific continuation periods. Triggered by the transmission information being transmitted at the timing, means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period (light emission data is set in the interrupt area 162b in the sound light side MPU 112) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, further comprising: a function and a function of setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f.

  According to the feature A8, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature A9. The specific range effect is a configuration that may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) with different aspects of the effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to suppress the unit of the control information group from being too fine, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit.

  Feature A10. The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature A8 or A9, wherein a transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

  According to the feature A10, the second control unit can perform the execution control of the specific range effect by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and transmit information directed to the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature A11. The second side execution means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific continuation period when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. It is what
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of A to A10.

  According to the feature A11, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side is a predetermined start opportunity, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the whole of the effects executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature A12. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature A11, wherein the first side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature A12, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side has a predetermined start trigger, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature A13. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature A12, comprising:

  According to the feature A13, when the specific range effect is started, the second control unit waits until transmission information is transmitted, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

Feature A14. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The predetermined start opportunity is a case where the bonus lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed when the bonus lottery process is executed.
The first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of a specific range effect during the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A14, in the configuration in which the second control means sets the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored and held. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first control unit performs the execution control of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control unit, the result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account in the execution control of the effect.

Feature A15. The second control means is configured to transmit transmission information toward the first control means when the predetermined output timing of the specific duration is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the benefit corresponding effect (determined effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (sound light) A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means is means for setting a control information group corresponding to the benefit corresponding effect (sound-side MPU 112) when the correspondence determining means determines that the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. The game machine according to feature A14, further comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 and executing the process of step S1208.

  According to the feature A15, the second control unit only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process. Therefore, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. Further, in the first control means, information on the result of the privilege lottery process is stored and held, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information for the second control means is optimized as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side Execution control can be performed.

Feature A16. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the contents of the effect to be performed by the second effect means,
When the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (a definite effect), the first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the light-side MPU 112 and step S1208 is performed). The game machine according to Feature A15, further comprising:

  According to the feature A16, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side, regardless of whether the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature A17. The first-side setting means can set a control information group corresponding to effects at different start timings during the specific continuation period from the content of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A16, wherein:

  According to the feature A17, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control unit.

  Feature A18. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature A8 is provided, a control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature A19. The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 45) and light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  For the configuration of the features A1 to A19, any of the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F9, the features G1 to G3, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The second control means includes
When a predetermined start is triggered, a specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) is executed by the second effect means during a specified duration (during game play, opening / closing execution mode). Second-side execution means (function to execute task processing in the display-side MPU 122),
A second set of specific control information groups (pattern data table, opening data table) used for causing the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start trigger occurs. Side setting means (function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122),
With
The first control means includes
First side execution means (executes light emission control processing, sound output control processing, and movable object control processing in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the first performance means to perform an effect corresponding to the specific range effect in the specific duration period. Function)
First side setting means (reading of light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting a control information group (light emission data, sound output data) used for causing the first effect means to execute an effect during the specific duration period. Processing and a function of executing sound output data reading processing),
With
The first side setting means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific continuation period at a time, but the second control means sets the control information group for each of the specific continuation periods. Triggered by the transmission information being transmitted at the timing, means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period (light emission data is set in the interrupt area 162b in the sound light side MPU 112) And a function of setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f.

  According to the feature B1, since the first control means is configured to perform the execution control of the effect of the first effect means according to the transmission information output each time from the second control means, the first effect means and the second effect means In the case where the effects are executed in the same period, it is difficult for the two effects to be shifted.

  In this case, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

  As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B2. The specific range effect is a configuration that may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) with different aspects of the effect,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to suppress the unit of the control information group from becoming too fine, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit.

  Feature B3. The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, which includes transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted.

  According to the feature B3, the second control unit can perform the execution control of the specific range effect by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and transmit information directed to the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing. Therefore, the information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature B4. The second side execution means executes the specific range effect by the second effect means during the specific continuation period when the first control means transmits transmission information due to the predetermined start trigger. It is what
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. A gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the feature B4, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side is a predetermined start opportunity, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature B5. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature B4, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature B5, in the configuration for specifying that the first control means side has a predetermined start opportunity, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature B6. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine according to Feature B5, characterized in that

  According to the feature B6, at the start of the specific range effect, it waits until the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

Feature B7. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The predetermined start opportunity is a case where the bonus lottery process is executed, and the specific range effect is executed when the bonus lottery process is executed.
The first control means stores and holds information on the result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of a specific range effect during the specific continuation period in the specific continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set by the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored and held. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first control unit performs the execution control of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control unit, the result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account in the execution control of the effect.

Feature B8. The second control means is configured to transmit transmission information toward the first control means when the predetermined output timing of the specific duration is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the benefit corresponding effect (determined effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process (sound light) A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the side MPU 112),
The first side setting means is means for setting a control information group corresponding to the benefit corresponding effect (sound-side MPU 112) when the correspondence determining means determines that the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature B7, further comprising: a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1207 and executing the process of step S1208.

  According to the feature B8, the second control unit only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process, so that the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. Further, in the first control means, information on the result of the privilege lottery process is stored and held, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information for the second control means is optimized as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side Execution control can be performed.

Feature B9. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the contents of the effect to be performed by the second effect means,
When the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (a definite effect), the first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the light-side MPU 112 and step S1208 is performed). The gaming machine according to Feature B8, which includes a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature B9, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature B10. The first-side setting means can set a control information group corresponding to effects at different start timings during the specific continuation period from the content of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein:

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control unit.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, since the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means, even if some communication abnormality occurs, It is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature B12. The game machine according to Feature B11, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker part 45) and light emitting means (light emitting part groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B12, any one of the features A1 to A19, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F9, the features G1 to G3, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The first control means is a first-side execution means (sound light) that causes the first effect means to execute an effect during a specific continuation period (during game play, opening / closing execution mode) when a predetermined start timing is reached. A function of executing light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object control processing in the side MPU 112),
The second control means includes
Second side setting means (in the display side MPU 122) for setting a specific control information group (pattern data table, opening data table) used for causing the second effect means to execute the effect during the specific duration. The function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806),
Second side execution means for causing the second effect means to execute an effect during the specific duration by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the specific control information group at each control execution timing. (Function for executing task processing in the display-side MPU 122);
In accordance with the progress of the specific duration period in the second rendering means, second transmission means for transmitting transmission information to the first control means (command setting processing in the display-side MPU 122 is executed) Function)
With
The first side executing means uses the transmission information transmitted by the second side transmitting means, and uses the transmission information transmitted from the second effect means to produce the contents of the effect to be executed by the first effect means during the specific duration period. Can be adapted to the content,
The second side transmission means does not transmit transmission information to the first control means every time the control execution timing is reached, but transmits transmission information to the first control means at a timing corresponding to a predetermined control execution timing. A gaming machine that is characterized by transmitting a message.

  According to the feature C1, the first control means uses the transmission information transmitted from the second control means, and the contents of the effects to be executed by the first effect means during the specific continuation period are the contents of the effects in the second effect means. Therefore, when the production is executed in the same period in each of the first production means and the second production means, it is difficult for both productions to be shifted.

  In this case, since the second control unit is configured to transmit the transmission information at the predetermined control execution timing, instead of transmitting the transmission information every time the control execution timing is reached, the second control unit It is possible to reduce the transmission frequency of transmission information in Thereby, the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

  As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

  Feature C2. The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which includes transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted.

  According to the feature C2, the second control unit can perform the execution control of the production during the specific continuation period by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and toward the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmission information. Therefore, information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature C3. The specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) executed during the specific duration in the second effect means includes a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach) with different effects. Display) etc., and
The game according to C1 or C2, wherein the second-side transmission unit transmits the transmission information so that the first control unit can specify the start timing of each production range. Machine.

  According to the feature C3, since the 2nd control means should just transmit transmission information according to each production range, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of transmission information. Moreover, in the 1st control means, when making the content of the effect performed by the 1st effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the 2nd effect means according to the transmission information which a 2nd control means transmits, each effect range Since it is only necessary to perform adjustment in units, it is easy to perform the adjustment.

  Feature C4. Any of the features C1 to C3, wherein the first side executing means grasps the contents of the effect to be executed during the specific duration from the transmission information transmitted by the second side transmitting means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C4, the first control means not only causes the contents of the effect to be executed by the first effect means according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control means but also corresponds to the contents of the effect in the second effect means. Since the contents of the effect to be executed need only follow the contents determined by the second control means, the processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the contents of the effect are uniquely determined by the first control means.

  Feature C5. The first control means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific duration, but the second control means determines each timing during the specific duration. Triggered by the transmission information transmitted in step 1, the first side setting means for setting a control information group corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific duration period (light emission data in the interrupt area 162b in the sound side MPU 112) And a function for setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein:

  According to the feature C5, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature C6. The specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) executed during the specific duration in the second effect means includes a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach) with different effects. Display) etc., and
The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature C6, the unit of the control information group can be prevented from becoming too fine, and the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit can be moderately suppressed.

Feature C7. The second execution means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect in the specific duration when the first control means transmits transmission information because the predetermined start trigger has been reached. Is,
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. C5 Or the game machine as described in C6.

  According to the feature C7, in the configuration that specifies that the first control means side is a predetermined start trigger, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature C8. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature C7, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature C8, in the configuration in which the first control means side specifies that a predetermined start trigger is given, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature C9. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, comprising:

  According to the feature C9, at the start of the specific range effect, it waits until the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit, whereas when the notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

Feature C10. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The predetermined start opportunity is a case where the bonus lottery process is executed, and an effect during the specific duration is executed when the bonus lottery process is executed.
Any of the features C5 to C9, wherein the first control means stores and holds information on a result of the privilege lottery process that triggered the execution of the effect during the specific duration in the specific duration A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C10, in the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set in the second control means, the result of the privilege lottery process in the first control means Information is stored and held. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first control unit performs the execution control of the effect according to the transmission information transmitted by the second control unit, the result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account in the execution control of the effect.

Feature C11. The second control means is configured to transmit transmission information toward the first control means when the predetermined output timing of the specific duration is reached regardless of the result of the privilege lottery process.
When the transmission information is received, the first control means determines whether or not the execution of the benefit corresponding effect (determined effect) corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process ( A function of executing the process of step S1205 in the sound light side MPU 112),
The first side setting means, when it is determined in the correspondence determination means that the content of the effect corresponding to the transmission information corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the control information corresponding to the transmission information The gaming machine according to Feature C10, further comprising means for setting a group (a function of making an affirmative determination in Step S1207 in the sound light side MPU 112 and executing the processing in Step S1208).

  According to the feature C11, the second control unit only needs to transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process, so that the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. Further, in the first control means, information on the result of the privilege lottery process is stored and held, and after determining whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. In order to perform the execution control of the effect, when the configuration for transmitting the transmission information for the second control means is optimized as described above, the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side Execution control can be performed.

Feature C12. The second control means can transmit transmission information corresponding to the contents of the effect to be performed by the second effect means,
When the second control means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (a definite effect), the first side setting means executes an effect corresponding to the specific effect. Regardless of whether or not the result corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, a means for setting a control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the light-side MPU 112 and step S1208 is performed). The game machine according to Feature C11, further comprising:

  According to the feature C12, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side, regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature C13. The first-side setting means can set a control information group corresponding to effects at different start timings during the specific continuation period from the content of one transmission information transmitted by the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C12.

  According to the feature C13, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the transmission information in the second control unit.

  Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature C5 is provided, a control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature C15. The game machine according to Feature C14, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 45) and light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C15, any of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F9, the features G1 to G3, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. First control means (sound light side MPU 112) for controlling first effect means (speaker unit 45, curtain plate movable unit 51, disk movable units 61a and 61b, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73);
Second control means (display side MPU 122) for controlling the second effect means (symbol display device 31);
With
The second control means transmits second transmission means (display-side MPU 122) that transmits predetermined transmission information to the first control means in accordance with the progress of the effect being executed by the second effect means. The function to execute command setting processing in
The first control means includes
Specifying means (function for executing the process of step S1204 in the sound light side MPU 112) for specifying that it is a predetermined timing when the second transmission means transmits the predetermined transmission information;
When the specifying means specifies that it is a predetermined timing, at least using information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information (game result information stored in the holding data area 161), the predetermined effect Whether or not to execute (determined effect), and content determining means for determining at least one of the contents of the predetermined effect (determined effect) (a function for executing the processing in steps S1205 and S1206 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, the first control means has a predetermined timing based on the predetermined transmission information transmitted from the second control means in accordance with the progress of the effect executed by the second effect means. Since the execution control of the effect of the first effect means is specified, when the effect is executed in the same period by each of the first effect means and the second effect means, there is a difference between both effects. It becomes difficult to occur.

  In this case, if the first control means specifies the predetermined timing, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect by using at least information different from the information included in the transmission information, and the predetermined effect. Determine at least one of the contents. Thereby, the predetermined transmission information only needs to include information that makes the first control means recognize that it is the predetermined timing, and includes information on whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and information on the content of the predetermined effect. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the predetermined transmission information, reduce the processing load of the second control means, and facilitate the design while making the contents of the effects in the first effect means appropriate. .

  As described above, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, control can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature D2. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The information different from the information included in the predetermined transmission information includes information on the result of the bonus lottery process (game result information stored in the holding data area 161). Game machines.

  According to the feature D2, in the configuration in which the first control unit determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect in response to transmission information being transmitted from the second control unit, and at least one of the contents of the predetermined effect. The result of the privilege lottery process can be taken into account when performing the execution control.

Feature D3. The content determining means includes
Correspondence determination means for determining whether or not the execution of the benefit-corresponding effect (determined effect) as the predetermined effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process when the specifying means specifies the predetermined timing. (Function for executing the process of step S1205 in the sound light side MPU 112);
When it is determined that the correspondence determination means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first side setting means (step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 112) sets the control information group corresponding to the privilege correspondence effect. Processing function), and
First side execution means (light emission control processing, sound output control processing and movable object in the sound light side MPU 112) that performs execution control of the production of the first effect means using the control information group set by the first side setting means Control processing)
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, further comprising:

  According to the feature D3, the second control unit may transmit the transmission information to the first control unit without taking into consideration the result of the privilege lottery process. Therefore, the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized. It is done. In addition, since the first control means determines whether or not the transmission information transmitted by the second control means corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the execution control of the effect is performed as described above. When the configuration for transmitting the transmission information is optimized for the control means, it is possible to perform the execution control of the production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process on the first control means side.

  Feature D4. The first side setting means, when the second side transmission means transmits transmission information corresponding to causing the second effect means to perform a specific effect (definite effect), an effect corresponding to the specific effect Regardless of whether or not the execution corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, the means for setting the control information group corresponding to the transmission information (affirmative determination is made in step S1203 in the sound-side MPU 112 and the step is performed) The gaming machine according to Feature D3, which includes a function of executing the processing of S1208.

  According to the feature D4, when the specific effect is performed by the second effect means, the first control means side regardless of whether or not the content of the specific effect corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process. Production execution control corresponding to the content of the specific production is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prioritize that the contents of the effects match between the first effect means and the second effect means, and it is possible to make it difficult for the effects to shift.

  Feature D5. The identification unit can identify the timing corresponding to execution of an effect different from the predetermined effect from the content of the predetermined transmission information, according to any one of the features D1 to D4, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, it is possible to consolidate information into one predetermined transmission information, and it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of the predetermined transmission information.

Feature D6. The second control means includes
When a predetermined start is triggered, a specific range effect (game play effect, effect for opening / closing execution mode) is executed by the second effect means during a specified duration (during game play, opening / closing execution mode). Second-side execution means (function to execute task processing in the display-side MPU 122),
A second set of specific control information groups (pattern data table, opening data table) used for causing the second effect means to execute the specific range effect when the predetermined start trigger occurs. Side setting means (function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S806 in the display side MPU 122),
With
The specific control information group includes information capable of specifying the control content at each control execution timing during the specific continuation period, and corresponds to the control execution timing toward the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein a transmission timing of transmission information to be transmitted is included.

  According to the feature D6, the second control unit can perform the production execution control during the specific duration by referring to the specific control information group at each control execution timing, and to the first control unit. It is also possible to specify the execution timing of the transmission information. Therefore, information to be referred to in the second control means is collected, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature D7. The specific range effect executed during the specific duration in the second effect means may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different effects.
The gaming machine according to claim D6, wherein the second-side transmission unit transmits the transmission information so that the first control unit can specify the start timing of each production range.

  According to the feature D7, since the 2nd control means should just transmit transmission information according to each production range, it is possible to suppress the transmission frequency of transmission information. Moreover, in the 1st control means, when making the content of the effect performed by the 1st effect means correspond to the content of the effect in the 2nd effect means according to the transmission information which a 2nd control means transmits, each effect range Since it is only necessary to perform adjustment in units, it is easy to perform the adjustment.

  Feature D8. The first control means does not set the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed during the specific duration, but the second control means determines each timing during the specific duration. Triggered by transmitting the transmission information at the first side setting means (sound light side MPU 112) for setting control information group (light emission data, sound output data) corresponding to a part of the effect executed during the specific continuation period The gaming machine according to D6 or D7, further comprising a function of setting light emission data in the interrupting area 162b and a function of setting sound output data from the final effect data group 152f.

  According to the feature D8, the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific continuation period is set on the second control means side. On the other hand, on the first control means side, the control information group corresponding to the whole is not set, and specific continuation is performed according to transmission information transmitted from the second control means at each timing during the specific continuation period. A part of control information group of effects executed during the period is set. As a result, the storage capacity required in the storage means for setting the control information group can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the control information group corresponding to the whole is set on each of the first control means side and the second control means side. Is possible.

Feature D9. The specific range effect executed during the specific duration in the second effect means may include a plurality of effect ranges (notice display, reach display, etc.) having different effects.
The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein the control information group corresponding to the part is set in correspondence with the plurality of production ranges.

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to suppress the unit of the control information group from being too fine, and it is possible to moderately suppress the setting frequency of the control information group in the first control unit.

Feature D10. The second execution means causes the second effect means to execute a specific range effect in the specific duration when the first control means transmits transmission information because the predetermined start trigger has been reached. Is,
The second side setting means is configured to set the specific control information group when the first control means transmits transmission information when the predetermined start timing is reached. Or the game machine as described in D9.

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration that specifies that the first control means side is a predetermined start opportunity, the second setting of the control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is performed. By adopting a configuration that is performed on the control means side, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature D11. The first side setting means sends transmission information corresponding to starting the specific range effect in response to the transmission of transmission information by the first control means due to the predetermined start trigger. 2 means for setting a predetermined control information group (light emission data at the start of fluctuation, sound output data at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to the start of the specific range effect (step S1202 in the sound light side MPU 112) Function to execute the process of)
The game according to Feature D10, wherein the first-side execution means starts an effect corresponding to the specific range effect after the first-side setting means sets the predetermined control information group. Machine.

  According to the feature D11, in the configuration in which the first control means side specifies that the predetermined start trigger has been specified, the first control means waits for the second control means to transmit the transmission information and then the specific range effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the start timing of the specific range effect.

Feature D12. The first control means includes
Notification specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the notification target event (function for executing the process of step S622 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Notification transmission means for transmitting the notification occurrence information to the second control means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means (the function of executing step S625 in the sound light side MPU 112) )When,
Notification execution means for notifying the first effect means when the occurrence of the notification target event is specified by the notification specifying means, regardless of whether the second control means transmits transmission information or not. (Function for executing the processing of step S623, step S624, step S1602, and step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 112);
A gaming machine according to Feature D11, comprising:

  According to the feature D12, when the specific range effect is started, the second control unit waits until transmission information is transmitted, whereas when a notification target event occurs, the transmission information is transmitted from the second control unit. The first control means starts the notification independently without waiting until it is done. Thereby, it is possible to start the notification at an early stage, and even if a communication abnormality occurs between the first control means and the second control means, the notification can be started on the first rendering means side. It becomes possible.

  Feature D13. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, wherein the second effect means is display means (symbol display device 31) having a display surface.

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In particular, when the configuration of the feature D6 is provided, a control information group corresponding to the entire effect executed in the specific duration is set in the second control means on the display control side of the display means. Therefore, even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue updating the display on the display means. Since the effect on the display means is easily noticed by the player, the update of the display on the display means is continued, so that the influence when a communication abnormality occurs is reduced.

  Feature D14. The game machine according to Feature D13, wherein the first effect means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 45) and light emitting means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73).

  In the configuration in which the effect is executed by the display means having the display surface and the effect is executed by at least one of the sound output means and the light emitting means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D14, any of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C15, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F9, the features G1 to G3, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, and the feature D group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a configuration in which a presentation is performed using a plurality of types of presentation devices is known.

  For example, a configuration in which a presentation is performed using at least a display device such as a liquid crystal display device and a speaker is known. In this case, a sound corresponding to display content on the display device is output from the speaker. Further, for example, a configuration is known in which an effect is produced using at least a light emitting unit such as an LED and a speaker. In this case, the light emitting unit is controlled with a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of sound output from the speaker. . In addition, for example, a configuration in which an effect is produced using at least the display device and the movable object is known. In this case, the operation of the movable object is started according to the display content on the display device.

  In a configuration in which a presentation is performed using a plurality of types of presentation devices as in the above examples, the processing load is distributed by changing the control means for controlling the execution of the presentation between a predetermined presentation device and a specific presentation device. It becomes possible. In this case, in a configuration using a plurality of control means, a configuration capable of performing good control is required.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Production means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of performing production,
Information setting means (in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting the control information group (light emission data) used for executing the effect in the effect means so as to be usable when performing the execution control of the effect means. A function for executing the process of reading the emission data), and
Execution means (in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the effect means to execute an effect during a predetermined period by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group when the control execution timing is reached. Function to execute the light emission control process),
With
The information setting means includes
Source information reading means (steps S1402, S1406, S1409 and S1415 in the sound light side MPU 112) for reading the original information (pallet data) used for setting the control information group from the storage means (sound light side ROM 113). Processing function), and
Deriving means for deriving the control information group by applying setting information (start position information, duration data) to the original information read by the original information reading means (executes data expansion processing in the sound light side MPU 112) Function)
With
The derivation means can derive different control information groups by applying different setting information to the original information.

  According to the feature E1, different control information groups are derived by applying different setting information to the original information. This reduces the storage capacity required in the storage means compared to a configuration in which different control information groups are stored in the storage means at the gaming machine manufacturing stage for each type of effect executed during a predetermined period. Is possible. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the execution control.

Feature E2. The derivation means includes
Means for applying the first setting information (start position number) to the original information (function for executing the process of step S1504 in the sound light side MPU 112);
Means for applying the second setting information (duration data) to the original information (function for executing the process of step S1505 in the sound light side MPU 112);
With
The storage means includes type relationship information (data selection table) that defines a correspondence relationship between the original information to be used, the type of the first setting information applied to the original information, and the type of the second setting information. 151g) is stored in the gaming machine according to Feature E1.

  According to the feature E2, since the control information group is derived by applying at least the first setting information and the second setting information to the original information, the control information derived from one original information It is possible to diversify the group. In this case, the storage unit stores in advance the type relationship information that defines the correspondence between the source information to be used, the type of first setting information applied to the source information, and the type of second setting information. Since it is a structure, simplification of the process for specifying the correspondence of original information and each setting information is achieved.

Feature E3. A plurality of the original information is stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein there are a plurality of setting information applicable to one original information.

  According to the feature E3, diversification of the control information group can be realized while suppressing the storage capacity required in the storage unit.

  Feature E4. The storage means stores correspondence information (start position data group 151b) that defines the correspondence between the original information to be used and the setting information applied to the original information. A gaming machine according to E3.

  According to the feature E4, the process for specifying the correspondence between the original information and the setting information can be simplified.

Feature E5. In the original information, the contents of the switching destination when the contents of the effects in the effecting means are sequentially switched are defined,
The deriving means indicates, as the setting information, a start criterion indicating which of the plurality of switching destination contents defined in the original information is to be used to start the rendering in the rendering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, further comprising means for applying information (starting position number) (a function of executing the processing of step S1504 in the sound light side MPU 112).

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of different starting reference information, and diversification of the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. This can be realized while simplifying the design.

Feature E6. In the original information, the contents of the switching destination when the contents of the effects in the effecting means are sequentially switched are defined,
The derivation means applies, as the setting information, continuation reference information (duration data) indicating a continuation period when each content of the switching destination defined in the original information is continued (on the sound side) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, further comprising: a function of executing the process of step S1505 in the MPU 112).

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to derive a plurality of control information groups from one original information by a simple method of different continuation reference information, and diversification of the control information groups while suppressing the storage capacity. This can be realized while simplifying the design.

Feature E7. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a),
The derivation means uses the same original information for the plurality of unit presentation means, and differs for at least the first unit presentation means and the second unit presentation means among the plurality of unit presentation means. It is characterized by comprising first deriving means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound light side MPU 112) to derive different control information groups by applying information. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E6.

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to derive different control information groups in the plurality of unit rendering means while using the same original information. As a result, the same original information can be used even when different effects are executed among a plurality of unit effect means, so that it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E8. The effect means includes a plurality of unit effect means (LEDs 71a to 73a),
The derivation means includes
First derivation means (function for executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1508 in the sound light side MPU 112) using the same original information for the plurality of unit effect means;
Second derivation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1510 to S1518 in the sound light side MPU 112) using the original information which is different for some of the unit effect means among the plurality of unit effect means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, comprising:

  According to the feature E8, it is possible to switch between a simple effect mode and a complex effect mode only by changing the number of pieces of original information used for a plurality of unit effect means.

  Feature E9. The second deriving unit applies the application target information (list data, group data) indicating the type of the original information to be applied to each of the plurality of unit presentation units as the setting information (sound side MPU 112). The game machine according to Feature E8, further comprising: a function of executing the processes of Step S1511 and Step S1512 in FIG.

  According to the feature E9, when applying different original information among a plurality of unit rendering means, it is only necessary to refer to the application target information, and thus the application process can be simplified.

Feature E10. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The control information group is for determining a light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the original information includes a content of a switching destination when light emitting content in the light emitting unit is sequentially switched.

  According to the feature E10, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

  For the configuration of the features E1 to E10, any of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D14, the features F1 to F9, the features G1 to G3, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  In addition, the invention of the above-mentioned feature E group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a control device having a CPU or a ROM or having a CPU, a ROM, or the like integrated into a single chip is provided. ), A configuration in which an effect is executed by controlling an effect device such as a speaker is known.

  In the control apparatus, the execution of the effect is controlled by reading data that determines the content of the effect and executing a process corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed by the control device is read and the display device performs a predetermined display using the read data. A configuration for controlling the display effect is conceivable. In the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read, and the light emitting unit is caused to emit light in a predetermined pattern using the read data. A configuration to control is conceivable. Also, in the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the control device is read, and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker using the read data, thereby producing the sound output effect. A configuration to control is conceivable.

  Here, it is preferable that there are many types of effects executed by the predetermined effect device, and there is room for improvement in the control method in increasing the types of effects.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Output means (speaker unit 45, light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification;
Information setting means (in the sound light side MPU 112) for setting control information groups (sound output data, light emission data) used for operating the output means to be usable when performing output control of the output means. A function of executing a process of reading out sound output data, a function of executing a process of reading out light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112),
When the control execution timing is reached, the information corresponding to the control execution timing is used in the control information group to execute the output means (function for executing sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 112) , A function of executing light emission control processing in the sound light side MPU 112),
With
A plurality of storage areas (first sound output area 171 to sixteenth sound output area 186, base area 162a, interrupt area 162b and notification area 162c) in which the control information group can be set,
When the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas, the execution means operates the output means by using a part of the control information group among the control information groups. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the characteristic F1, in the situation where the output control of the output unit is performed using one control information group, it is necessary to perform the output control of the output unit using another control information group. In addition, the other control information group can be stored separately from the one control information group. Thereby, it is possible to perform various operation | movement according to a condition in one output means. Further, when switching from one operation to the next operation, it is possible to leave a control information group corresponding to the former operation, so that the processing load when returning to the former operation can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suitably use the output means.

Feature F2. The control information group includes designation information (pointer information) that enables identification of information corresponding to each control execution timing.
The execution means is to operate the output means in a manner corresponding to the control information group by reading out and using information corresponding to the designation information from the control information group,
Among the control information groups stored in the plurality of storage areas, the designation information of the control information group that is not the use target of the execution means is also used for the designation information of the control information group that is the use target. Feature F1 including update means (a function for executing the process of step S1610 in the sound light side MPU 112 and a function of executing the process of step S1814 in the sound light side MPU 112) for updating when the update is performed The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature F2, when the use of the previously used control information group is stopped and the use of another control information group is started, the use of the other control information group is terminated and used earlier. When returning to the state in which the control information group that has been used is restored, at the return timing, the output unit performs the same operation as when the control information group previously used is continuously used. As a result, even if an interrupt use of another control information group occurs, an operation corresponding to the elapsed time can be performed by the output means.

  In particular, in a configuration in which the operation of the output unit is performed in association with another output unit, it is possible to ensure the correspondence with the operation of the other output unit.

Feature F3. In the control information group stored in the plurality of storage areas, a priority in the case where the output unit is used is determined,
The execution means uses the control information group having a high priority when using a part of the control information group when the control information group is stored in a plurality of the storage areas. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2.

  According to the feature F3, in a configuration in which a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, a control information group having a high priority is a target of use, and thus the operation of the output unit can be made appropriate. Further, even when a plurality of control information groups are stored at the same time, it is possible to easily select a control information group to be used by comparing priorities. Therefore, the process for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

  Feature F4. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the plurality of storage areas are provided corresponding to the priorities.

  According to the feature F4, since the priority is set in units of storage areas, it is not necessary to compare priorities for each control information group when selecting a control information group to be used. Therefore, the process for selecting the control information group to be used can be simplified.

Feature F5. The execution means includes
Notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to execute notification when the control information group for notification is a use target;
Effect execution means (function to execute the processing of steps S1604 and S1605 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to execute an effect when the control information group for effect is the target of use When,
With
The gaming machine according to F3 or F4, wherein the control information group for notification has a higher priority than the control information group for presentation.

  According to the feature F5, the execution of the notification can be given priority over the execution of the effect, and when priority is given to the execution of the notification, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, thereby simplifying the process.

Feature F6. The execution means includes
Base execution means (a function for executing the process of step S1605 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform a base operation when the control information group for base is a usage target;
An interrupt execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the sound light side MPU 112) that causes the output means to perform an interrupt operation when the control information group for interrupt is a usage target;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the priority of the control information group for interruption is higher than that of the control information group for base.

  According to the feature F6, the interrupt operation can be executed with priority over the base operation, and the design of the operation in the output means can be facilitated. Further, when priority is given to the interrupt operation, it is only necessary to compare the priorities, thereby simplifying the processing.

Feature F7. At least the specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) of the plurality of storage areas is configured such that a new control information group storage instruction can be generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area. Yes,
The control information group stored in the specific storage area has a storage priority (light emission side priority) for storing in the specific storage area,
When a storage instruction for a new control information group is generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is more than the new control information group. When the storage priority is high, the storage state of the already stored control information group is maintained without executing the storage process of the new control information group, and the new control information group is more When the storage priority is higher than the control information group that is already stored, the writing means for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area (the processing of steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound light side MPU 112 is executed) The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein

  According to the feature F7, when the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area is determined, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities. Therefore, the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. Figured.

Feature F8. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The execution means includes
Confirmation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for confirming the occurrence of a privilege when the control information group for confirming the occurrence of a privilege is a usage target;
Expectation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for expectation of benefit occurrence when the control information group for expectation of benefit occurrence is a use target;
With
The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the privilege generation control information group has a higher storage priority than the privilege generation expectation control information group.

  According to the feature F8, priority can be given to the execution of the effect for determining the bonus occurrence. In addition, when priority is given to the execution of the effect for determining the occurrence of the privilege, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified.

Feature F9. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the control information group is for determining a light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.

  According to the feature F9, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F9, any of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G3, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Output means (light emitting unit groups 71 to 73) capable of executing at least one of production and notification;
Information setting means for storing a control information group (light emission data) used for operating the output means in a specific storage area (interrupt area 162b) so that it can be used when performing output control of the output means. (A function of executing a process of reading light emission data in the sound light side MPU 112);
Execution means (sound light side MPU 112) that operates the output means by using information corresponding to the control execution timing in the control information group set in the specific storage area when the control execution timing comes. Function to execute the light emission control process in
With
The control information group stored in the specific storage area has a storage priority (light emission side priority) for storing in the specific storage area,
When a storage instruction for a new control information group is generated in a situation where the control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, the already stored control information group is more than the new control information group. When the storage priority is high, the storage state of the already stored control information group is maintained without executing the storage process of the new control information group, and the new control information group is more When the storage priority is higher than the control information group that is already stored, the writing means for overwriting the new control information group in the specific storage area (the processing of steps S1412 to S1416 in the sound light side MPU 112 is executed) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the characteristic G1, when it is necessary to perform output control of the output means using another control information group in a situation where the output control of the output means is performed using one control information group, the other It is possible to switch to output control using the control information group. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform various operation | movement according to a condition in one output means.

  Further, in a configuration in which a new control information group can be overwritten even when a control information group is already stored in the specific storage area, a state in which a control information group having a high storage priority is stored in the specific storage area; Therefore, the operation in the output means can be made appropriate. Furthermore, when determining the control information group to be stored in the specific storage area, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities. Therefore, the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified. As described above, it is possible to suitably use the output means.

Feature G2. Provided with a privilege lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
The execution means includes
Confirmation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for confirming the occurrence of a privilege when the control information group for confirming the occurrence of a privilege is a usage target;
Expectation execution means for causing the output means to execute an effect for expectation of benefit occurrence when the control information group for expectation of benefit occurrence is a use target;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the privilege generation control information group has a higher storage priority than the privilege generation expectation control information group.

  According to the feature G2, priority can be given to execution of the effect for finalizing the bonus. In addition, when priority is given to the execution of the effect for determining the occurrence of the privilege, it is only necessary to compare the storage priorities, so that the process for storing the control information group in the specific storage area can be simplified.

Feature G3. The effect means is a light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to Feature G1 or G2, wherein the control information group is for determining a light emission pattern of the light emitting means during the predetermined period.

  According to the feature G3, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described regarding the light emission control of the light emitting means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G3, any of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F9, and the features H1 to H10 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature F group and the feature G group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. As these gaming machines, a control device having a CPU or a ROM or having a CPU, a ROM, or the like integrated into a single chip is provided. ), A configuration in which an effect or notification is executed by controlling an output device such as a speaker is known.

  In the control device, the data that determines the contents of the effects and notifications are read, and the execution of the effects and notifications is controlled by executing processing corresponding to the read data. Specifically, in the display control of the display device, for example, data corresponding to the contents to be executed or notification to be executed by the control device is read, and the display device performs a predetermined display using the read data. Thus, a configuration for controlling the execution of the display effect and the display for notification can be considered. In the light emission control of the light emitting unit, for example, data corresponding to the contents to be executed or notification to be executed in the control device is read, and the light emitting unit is caused to emit light in a predetermined pattern using the read data. A configuration for controlling the execution of the production and the light emission for notification is conceivable. In the sound output control of the speaker, for example, data corresponding to the contents to be executed or notification to be executed in the control device is read, and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker using the read data, so that sound output is performed. A configuration for controlling the execution of the production and the sound output for notification is conceivable.

  Here, there is a demand for a suitable control method with respect to the performance and notification.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Production execution means (design display device 31, curtain plate movable object 52) for performing the production;
Motion detection means (production operation device 48) capable of detecting the player's motion;
Executing the effect so that a specific effect (corresponding effect) is executed when a corresponding execution condition is established based on the player's motion being detected by the motion detection means within a predetermined period (operation valid period) Specific control means for controlling the means (in the first embodiment, the display-side MPU 122 refers to the first branch-side base table or the second branch-side base table while referring to the first branch side base table or the second branch side base table; In the embodiment, the display-side MPU 122 performs a process of steps S2401 to S2405 while referring to the first branch-side base table or the second branch-side base table),
Opportunity giving means (in the first embodiment) for giving an opportunity for the specific effect to be executed or an opportunity to be executed thereafter, based on at least one condition that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period. A function of executing the processing of steps S1801 to S1805 while referring to the base data table in the display-side MPU 122. In the third embodiment, the display-side MPU 122 refers to the first opportunity-giving base table or the second opportunity-giving base table. While executing the processing of step S2401 to step S2405)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, even if the specific performance is not executed because the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period, the execution opportunity of the specific performance is obtained based on at least one condition that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied. Since it is given, it becomes possible for the player to increase opportunities to confirm the specific performance. For example, even if a player who wants to see a specific performance notices that it is within a predetermined period and the opportunity disappears, it is possible to generate the execution opportunity of the specific performance again. . Therefore, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

Feature H2. The opportunity giving means is to re-generate the predetermined period thereafter, with at least one condition that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period,
The specific control means is configured so that the specific effect is executed when a corresponding execution condition is satisfied based on the action of the player being detected by the action detection means within the predetermined time period that has occurred again. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the game execution unit is controlled.

  According to the feature H2, even if the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period, the predetermined period is generated again on the condition, so that the player is in a situation where a specific effect is generated based on the player's action. It can be provided again.

Feature H3. Non-specific control means (based on the first embodiment) that controls the effect execution means so that a non-specific effect (non-correspondence effect) is executed when the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period. A function of executing the processes of steps S1801 to S1805 while referring to the data table, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2405 while referring to the base data table or the first opportunity granting data table in the third embodiment. )
The opportunity giving means determines whether or not the corresponding execution condition is satisfied after the non-specific effect is executed, based on at least one condition that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, wherein the specific effect is executed regardless of the feature H1 or H2.

  According to the feature H3, even if the non-specific effect is executed because the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period, the specific effect is forcibly executed after that, so that the specific effect is surely visible to the player. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature H4. When the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the predetermined period, the content of the specific effect that is executed without being given the opportunity by the opportunity giving means, and the opportunity by the opportunity giving means is given. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the content of the specific performance to be executed is the same.

  According to the feature H4, since it is not necessary to change the content of the specific effect depending on whether or not the opportunity is given by the opportunity giving means, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary to execute the specific effect. It becomes.

Feature H5. Unit effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a unit effect (game play effect) is executed when a predetermined start opportunity is established (step S1002 with reference to the pattern data table in the display side MPU 122) ~ Function of executing the process of step S1009),
The specific control means causes the predetermined period to occur within the range of the unit effect, and the specific effect is executed within the range of the unit effect when the corresponding execution condition is satisfied within the predetermined period. And
In the case where the opportunity granting unit grants an opportunity for the specific effect to be executed or an opportunity that can be executed after at least one condition that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period, the predetermined period The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4, characterized in that the opportunity is given within the range of the unit effect in which the occurrence of the game.

  According to the feature H5, when the opportunity to execute the specific effect is given because the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period, it is possible to keep the influence within the range of one unit effect. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the control for executing each unit effect from being complicated.

  In addition, the grant determination means (function to perform the process of step S403 in the main side MPU 92) for performing grant determination for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and the player in the grant determination means In the configuration provided with a privilege granting unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 92) that grants a privilege to the player when it is determined to grant, the unit effect control unit Is good also as a structure made into the production result corresponding to the grant judgment result of the grant judging means, when ending the unit production.

Feature H6. Period determining means for determining a continuous execution period of the unit effect (function of executing the process of step S409 in the main MPU 92),
The unit effect control means ends the unit effect when the continuous execution period has elapsed since the start of the unit effect.
In the case where the opportunity granting unit grants an opportunity for the specific effect to be executed or an opportunity that can be executed after at least one condition that the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period, the predetermined period The gaming machine according to Feature H5, characterized in that the opportunity is given so that the unit effect ends within the range of the continuous execution period of the unit effect in which the occurrence of the unit effect occurs.

  According to the feature H6, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the specific effect while not affecting the continuous execution period of the unit effect. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above without affecting the digestion rate of the unit effect.

Feature H7. Non-specific control means (based on the first embodiment) that controls the effect execution means so that a non-specific effect (non-correspondence effect) is executed when the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period. A function of executing the processes of steps S1801 to S1805 while referring to the data table, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2405 while referring to the base data table or the first opportunity granting data table in the third embodiment. )
The gaming machine according to feature H5 or H6, wherein an execution period of the specific effect is different from an execution period of the non-specific effect.

  According to the feature H7, in the configuration in which the execution period is different between the specific effect and the non-specific effect, an opportunity is given to execute the specific effect when the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period. It is possible to adjust the execution period.

  Feature H8. The opportunity giving means is an opportunity for the specific effect to be executed after the action execution means is detected by the action detecting means within the predetermined period, but the specific execution is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, characterized in that it gives an opportunity to execute a specific performance.

  According to the feature H8, even if the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied, the execution opportunity of the specific effect is given on the condition that the player's action is detected within the predetermined period. It is possible to give the execution opportunity to the player who wants to see, and it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity from being given meaninglessly to the player who does not want to see the specific performance. It becomes.

  Feature H9. The features H1 to H8 are characterized in that the corresponding execution condition is satisfied when the number of times the player's motion is detected by the motion detection means is equal to or more than a specific number determined as a plurality of times within the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature H9, even if a predetermined period occurs, the player's movement needs to occur a specific number of times or more, so that it is possible to increase the number of player's movements during the predetermined period. However, in this configuration, there is a possibility that the player can't see the specific effect without being able to make the number of movements more than the specific number of times during the predetermined period even though the player wants to see the specific effect. Occurs. On the other hand, since the configuration such as the feature H1 is provided and the execution opportunity of the specific effect is given again, it is possible to give a relief measure to such a player.

  Feature H10. The opportunity granting means is an opportunity for the corresponding performance to be executed after the action detecting means has detected the player's action within the predetermined period but the number of times of detection has not reached the specified number of times. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to Feature H9, characterized in that it gives an opportunity to execute the specific performance.

  According to the feature H10, even if the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied, the execution opportunity of the specific effect is given on the condition that the player's action is detected within the predetermined period. It is possible to give the execution opportunity to the player who wants to see, and it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity from being given meaninglessly to the player who does not want to see the specific performance. It becomes.

  For the configuration of the features H1 to H10, any of the features A1 to A19, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F9, and the features G1 to G3 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Note that the invention of the above-described feature group H can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. A configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game state is shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  As a gaming machine as described above, there is known a configuration in which an effect operating device operated by a player is provided, and the content of the effect is changed according to the operation of the effect operating device. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, an effect operation device is provided on the front surface of the game machine, and an effect according to the operation of the effect operation device by the player is performed on a screen display in order to make the player expect a special game state to occur. The configuration is known. As a result, the player operates the effect operating device while expecting the occurrence of a special gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a novel gaming machine is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Production operation device, 52 ... Moveable curtain plate, 92 ... Main side MPU, 93 ... Main side ROM, 94 ... Main side RAM, 112 ... Sound light side MPU, 113 ... Sound light side ROM, 114 ... Sound light side RAM, 122 ... Display side MPU, 123 ... Display side ROM, 124 ... Display side RAM.

Claims (2)

Grant determination means for performing grant determination for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination being a privilege grant result;
Production execution means for performing production,
Unit effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that the unit effect ends in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant determination after the unit effect is started;
Motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
Specific control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a specific effect is executed when a corresponding execution condition is established based on the player's motion being detected by the motion detection means within a predetermined period of time . When,
In the situation where the corresponding execution condition is not satisfied within the predetermined period of the unit performance of the predetermined execution times, the predetermined period is set in the unit effect corresponding to the grant determination as the bonus grant result thereafter. An opportunity giving means to generate,
With
The specific control means, detects the number of operations of the player in the operation detection means for the corresponding execution condition during the period is determined to have satisfied the predetermined period is generated by the opportunity applying means, the predetermined means to be a number less than the detection frequency of operation of the player in the operation detection means for the corresponding execution condition during the period is determined to have satisfied the predetermined time period in the unit directing the execution times A gaming machine characterized by comprising.   The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images